FCC ID: B94-MT7921S 2TX 11ax (WiFi6_) + BLE Combo Card

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Product notice Software terms This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems might require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees might apply and additional requirements might apply over time for updates. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2020 HP Development Company, L.P. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Lync, Office 365, Skype, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. USB Type-C and USB-

C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. Miracast is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: December 2020 Document Part Number: M28701-001 Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 1 2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Left ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 6 Touchpad ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Touchpad settings ............................................................................................................. 6 Adjusting touchpad settings .......................................................................... 6 Turning on the touchpad ................................................................................ 6 Touchpad components ...................................................................................................... 6 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 7 Button, speakers, and SIM card tray ................................................................................................... 8 Using your HP Elite Slim Active Pen .................................................................................................... 9 Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 10 Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 11 Hot keys ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Using a SIM card ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Determining the correct SIM card size for your computer ................................................................ 15 Inserting a SIM card in the digital pen pocket ................................................................................... 15 3 Network connections ................................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 16 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 16 Wireless button ............................................................................................................... 16 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 16 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 17 Using HP Mobile Broadband .............................................................................................................. 17 Using eSIM ......................................................................................................................................... 18 Using GPS ........................................................................................................................................... 18 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ...................................................................................................... 18 v Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 18 Connecting to a wired network ............................................................................................................................ 19 4 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 20 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 20 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 20 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 20 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) ....................................................................... 21 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ......................................................................... 21 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...................................................................... 21 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ......................................................................... 22 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) .................................................................. 22 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ............................................................................................ 22 One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 23 Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 23 Using an on-screen keyboard .............................................................................................................................. 23 5 Entertainment features ............................................................................................................................... 24 Using a camera .................................................................................................................................................... 24 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 24 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 24 Viewing or changing sound settings .............................................................................. 24 Using the control panel to view and control audio settings .......................................... 24 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays ........................................... 25 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port ......................................................................................... 25 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 27 Using Sleep .......................................................................................................................................................... 27 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 28 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 28 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 28 Using HP Fast Charge ........................................................................................................................ 29 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 29 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 29 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 29 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 29 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 29 vi Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 30 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 30 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 30 Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 30 7 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 31 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 32 Managing a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................ 32 Setting a new BIOS administrator password .................................................................. 32 Changing a BIOS administrator password ...................................................................... 33 Deleting a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................ 33 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 34 Windows Hello ..................................................................................................................................................... 34 Using antivirus software ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Using firewall software ........................................................................................................................................ 34 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 35 8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 36 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 36 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 36 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 36 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 36 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 36 Removing dirt and debris from your computer ................................................................................ 37 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ..................................................................................... 37 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 38 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ........................................................................................................... 40 Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 40 Using Windows tools for backing up ................................................................................................. 40 Restoring and recovering your system ............................................................................................................... 40 Creating a system restore ................................................................................................................. 40 Restoring and recovery methods ...................................................................................................... 40 10 Computer Setup (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................... 41 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 41 vii Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 41 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 41 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................................... 42 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code ........................................................ 42 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ......................................................................................................... 42 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ................................................................ 42 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................................................. 43 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ................................ 43 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 44 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 44 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 44 13 Electrostatic discharge ............................................................................................................................... 46 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 47 HP and accessibility ............................................................................................................................................. 47 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 47 The HP commitment ......................................................................................................................... 47 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 48 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 48 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 48 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 48 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 49 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 49 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 49 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 49 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 50 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 50 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 50 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 50 Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 51 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 52 viii 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and where to find additional HP resources. TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Windows key After you set up and register the computer, HP recommends the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Connect to the internetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 16. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 34. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 20 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard driveCreate recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive to back up your hard drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 40. Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar search box. Then select Support. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information 1 Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource or Contents Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Components Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware Use these instructions to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Locating software Use these instructions to find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the right side of the computer. Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Speaker Battery light

(3) USB Type-C port Description Produces sound. When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent. Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90 percent. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Off: The battery is not charging. Connects a USB device, provides data transfer, and charges small devices when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. Locating hardware 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack NOTE: Cables, adapters, or both (purchased separately) might be required. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Left Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the left side of the computer. Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2) USB Type-C port Connects a USB device, provides data transfer, and charges small devices when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Cables, adapters, or both (purchased separately) might be required. Battery light When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is not charging.

(3) Speaker Produces sound. 4 Chapter 2 Components Display Use the illustration and table to identify the display components. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Ambient light sensor*

Camera lights Internal microphones Camera

(5) Camera privacy cover

(6)

(7) WLAN antennas*

WWAN antennas (select products only)*

Detects ambient light in the environment. On: The camera is in use. NOTE: The infrared camera lights are used only during the Windows Hello login procedure. Record sound. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera on page 24. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello on page 34. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWANs).

*The ambient light sensor and antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal WLAN and WWAN transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. Display 5 Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. Touchpad The touchpad settings and components are described here. Touchpad settings You learn how to adjust the touchpad settings and components here. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 1. Type touchpad settings in the taskbar search box, and then press enter. Choose a setting. 2. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. 2. Type touchpad settings in the taskbar search box, and then press enter. Using an external mouse, click the Touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Touchpad components Use the illustration and table to identify the touchpad components. 6 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-4 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description Touchpad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 20. Left touchpad button Right touchpad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

(1)

(2)

(3) Lights Use the illustration and table to identify the lights on the computer. Keyboard area 7 Table 2-5 Lights and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Power light Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Privacy key light (select products only) On: Privacy screen is on, which helps prevent side-angle viewing. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: The computer is off or in Sleep. On: The fn key is locked. For more information, see Hot keys on page 13.

(4) Fn lock light Button, speakers, and SIM card tray Use the illustration and table to identify the button, speakers, and SIM card tray on the computer. 8 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-6 Button, speakers, and SIM card tray and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Speakers SIM card tray (select products only) Power button Description Produce sound. You can insert a SIM card in the SIM tray located inside the pen pocket. For more information, see Using a SIM card on page 14. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Right-click the Power meter icon and then select Power Options. Using your HP Elite Slim Active Pen Use the illustration and table to identify the digital pen and its features. Keyboard area 9 Table 2-7 Digital pen features and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Digital pen pocket Bottom button

(3) Top button

(4) Digital pen light

(5) Pairing button Description A recessed area for storing and charging the digital pen. Erases content on the screen. NOTE: You can configure the action of this button in the pen software that is installed on your computer. Press and hold the button and tap the screen to imitate the action of a right-click of your mouse. NOTE: You can configure the action of this button in the pen software that is installed on your computer. Blinking blue (slowly): The pen is in pairing mode. Blinking blue (fast): The pen has paired successfully. Blinking red: The battery charge level is low. Blinking white: The pen is charging. White: The pen is fully charged. To connect your digital pen to your computer, press and hold the pairing button for 5 seconds. For more information, see Connecting Bluetooth devices on page 18. NOTE: You can configure the action of this button in the pen software that is installed on your computer.

*The Regulatory Model Number (RMN) for this equipment is STA-WP01. Turn on your digital pen by tapping the tip on any surface. Special keys Use the illustration and table to identify the special keys. 10 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-8 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in conjunction with another key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. See Action keys on page 11. Action keys Action keys perform specific functions and vary by computer. To determine which keys are on your computer, look at the icons on your keyboard and match them to the descriptions in this table. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. NOTE: To quickly turn on the highest privacy setting, press fn+p. Keyboard area 11 Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing the key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. 12 Chapter 2 Components NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature by pressing and holding the fn key and the left shift key. The fn lock light will turn on. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Hot keys A hot key is the combination of the fn key and another key. Use the table to identify the hot keys. To use a hot key:

Press and hold the fn key, and then press one of the keys listed in the following table. Table 2-10 Hot keys and their descriptions Key Description R S W Breaks the operation. Sends a programing query. Pauses the operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels might be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of these examples. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Table 2-11 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Warranty period Product ID Serial number Labels 13 Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Using a SIM card Use these instructions to insert a SIM card. IMPORTANT: You can damage the SIM card if you insert the wrong size card or insert it or the SIM card tray in the wrong direction. The card might also become stuck in the slot. Do not use SIM card adapters. To prevent damage to the SIM card or connectors, use minimal force when inserting or removing a SIM card. 14 Chapter 2 Components Determining the correct SIM card size for your computer Before purchasing a SIM card, follow these instructions to determine the correct SIM card size for your computer. 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then search for your computer by product name or number. Select Product Information. Refer to the listed options to determine which card to purchase. Inserting a SIM card in the digital pen pocket To insert a SIM card, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off the computer by using the Shut down command. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. If the digital pen is present, remove it from the pocket. Insert the SIM card into the SIM card tray, and then insert the tray into the slot, and then press in on the SIM card tray until it is firmly seated. IMPORTANT: Do not use the digital pen to insert or remove the SIM card tray from the slot. NOTE: Your SIM card, SIM card tray, or the SIM card slot in your computer might look different from the illustration in this section. NOTE: Your SIM card slot might have an icon to show which way the card should be inserted into the computer. Using a SIM card 15 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer is equipped with multiple wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features. Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer has a wireless button and two wireless devices. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Network and Sharing Center. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. 16 Chapter 3 Network connections Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. 1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to:

NOTE:

NOTE:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 3. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number is printed on a label located on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information that is included with your computer or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Connecting to a wireless network 17 For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using eSIM Your computer supports the use of an eSIM. An eSIM is a programmable version of the commonly used SIM that you can use to download different profiles from selected carriers. An eSIM lets you connect to the internet over a cellular data connection. With an eSIM, you do not need to get a SIM card from your mobile operator, and you can quickly switch between mobile operators and data plans. For example, you might have one cellular data plan for work and a different plan with another mobile operator for personal use. If you travel, you can connect in more places by finding mobile operators with plans in that area. You can implement eSIMs in two ways:

The eSIM chip can be embedded (eUICC). The notebook then operates as a dual SIM, one as eUICC and the second as standard micro or nano SIM card on a SIM card tray. Only one SIM can be active at a time. A removable physical eSIM is placed on a SIM card tray like a standard micro or nano SIM card, but the eSIM is not limited to a single carrier (physical blank eSIM). You must add an eSIM profile to connect to the internet using cellular data. To add a profile, manage SIM profiles, and learn how to use an eSIM, go to https://www.support.microsoft.com , and type Use an eSIM in the search bar. Using GPS Your computer is equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, be sure that location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. 2. Using Bluetooth wireless devices Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Digital pen Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 18 Chapter 3 Network connections 1. 2. 3. 4. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth is turned on for that device. Some NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. NOTE: The digital pen included with your computer does not automatically pair during the intial setup of your computer. Removing the digital pen from the digital pen pocket prompts Windows to initiate a swift pairing of the pen and show a notification on your display. Using the digital pen on the display when the pen has not been stored in the pen pocket and has previously powered down prompts Windows to initiate a swift pairing of the pen and show a notification on your display. Connecting to a wired network Your computer requires a dock or a USB adapter (sold separately) to connect to wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connections. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. NOTE: Although you can connect your computer to a wired network through a docking station or external adapter, your computer does not support S4/S5 WOL (Wake on LAN) or UEFI PXE boot via LAN functionality. Connecting to a wired network 19 4 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate the touch screen, touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. 20 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the taskbar search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures 21 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) Swipe three fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe three fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe three fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) Swipe four fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe four fingers left or right to switch between desktops. Swipe four fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. 22 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard These instructions help you learn to use the on-screen keyboard. 1. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. 2. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 23 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera Your computer has one camera that enables you to connect with others for work or play. Your camera allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To determine which camera is on your product, see Components on page 3. To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Some cameras also feature HD (high-definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Security on page 31 for details about using Windows Hello. You can enhance your computer privacy by covering the lens with the camera privacy cover. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on an attached external optical drive. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Viewing or changing sound settings Use these instructions to view or change sound settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using the control panel to view and control audio settings You can view or change sound settings using the audio control panel. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. 24 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Your computer supports a maximum of two external displays. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays Follow these steps to discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps. NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow these steps. Type project in the taskbar search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port To connect devices to a USB Type-C port, follow these steps. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. Using video 25 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. 26 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. Your computer does not support the use of the Hibernation state. SleepThe Sleep state automatically initiates after a period of inactivity. Your work is available in memory, allowing you to resume your work quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. Depending on your computer model, the Sleep state might also support Modern Standby mode. This mode keeps some internal operations awake and enables your computer to receive web notifications, such as emails, while in Sleep. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 27. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always turn off your computer instead of using the Sleep state anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in several ways. Briefly press the power button. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap the touchpad. When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. IMPORTANT:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. 1. 2. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When the computer has a charged battery and is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Using HP Fast Charge The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery charges to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon. Conserving battery power Lower the brightness of the display. Follow these steps to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the computer warns you in one of several ways. The battery light indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 28. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If the computer is in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product AC adapter Running on battery power 29 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery The battery in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When updating the system BIOS When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Security Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, Computer Setup

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and Computer Setup (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Table 7-1 Security solutions Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. You can set several types of passwords, depending on how you want to control access to your information. You can set passwords in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. 31 Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Factory-sealed battery The battery in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 7-2 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. User password Protects access to a Windows user account. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Table 7-3 Types of Computer Setup passwords and their functions Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled.

*For details, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps. Setting a new BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password helps prevent unauthorized access to Computer Setup. Use these instructions to set a new BIOS administrator password. 1. Computers with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Start Computer Setup. Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password, and then press enter. 32 Chapter 7 Security 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to change a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to delete a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. Using passwords 33 NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same keys that you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Windows Hello Windows Hello allows you to enroll your facial ID and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your facial ID or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Password, and then select Add. Under Windows Hello Face, select Set up. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you continue to use an antivirus program to fully protect your computer. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program that you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 34 Chapter 7 Security Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. To view or change the settings:

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing software updates 35 8 Maintenance Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. To run Disk Defragmenter:

NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. 1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers regularly. Updates can resolve issues and provide new features and options. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. 36 Chapter 8 Maintenance Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. 2. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with diluted mild detergent or household cleaner. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. 6. 7. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 37 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 37, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the 2. surfaces. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. Cleaning your computer 37 CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Back up your information to an external drive. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Shut down the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. 38 Chapter 8 Maintenance WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer with a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 39 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. Backing up information and creating recovery media You can use Windows tools for backing up your information. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 40. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. 1. 2. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. Run a Microsoft System Restore. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. 40 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS) HP provides several tools to help set up and protect your computer. Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as hard drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. To start Computer Setup, turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup You can navigate and select in Computer Setup using one or more methods. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS will be available on through Windows Update. If Windows Update is enabled to automatically download and install BIOS updates on your computer, the BIOS will update the next time you restart your computer. Using Computer Setup 41 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 42. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. Depending on the instructions on the screen, choose one of these options:

If failure ID link is displayed, select the link and follow the on-screen instructions. If instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 43. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. 42 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number to a USB flash drive. NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive 43 12 Specifications When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. Input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) 5C to 35C 20C to 60C 41F to 95F 4F to 140F 44 Chapter 12 Specifications Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications (continued) Factor Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating Metric 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

U.S. 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 45 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 46 Chapter 13 Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 48. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. HP and accessibility 47 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options 48 Chapter 14 Accessibility If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 51. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-

based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Standards and legislation 49 Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations United States Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. Australia Canada Europe Worldwide Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Lighthouse International Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-

related limitations. 50 Chapter 14 Accessibility California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ILO Global Business and Disability network ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. Job Accommodation Network European Disability Forum EnableMart Microsoft Enable HP links These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Contacting support 51 Index A accessibility 47 accessibility needs assessment 48 action keys 11 identifying 11 keyboard backlight 12 mute 12 next 12 pause 12 play 12 privacy screen 11 screen brightness 12 speaker volume 12 using 11 wireless 12 Action keys, identifying 11 administrator password 32 airplane mode key 16 antivirus software 34 assistive technology (AT) finding 48 purpose 47 AT (assistive technology) finding 48 purpose 47 audio 24 adjusting volume 12 sound settings 24 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 4 B backup, creating 40 backups 40 battery conserving power 29 discharging 29 factory-sealed 30, 32 low battery levels 29 resolving low battery level 29, 30 battery charge 29 battery light 3, 4 battery power 28 52 Index BIOS updating 41 Bluetooth device 16, 18 Bluetooth label 13 bottom 13 buttons digital pen 10 digital pen, pairing 10 left touchpad 7 power 9 right touchpad 7 C camera 5 identifying 5 using 24 camera light, identifying 5 camera privacy cover using 24 camera privacy cover, identifying 5 caps lock light, identifying 8 caring for your computer 36 cleaning your computer 36 disinfecting 37 removing dirt and debris 37 components display 5 keyboard area 6 left side 4 right side 3 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 32, 33, 34 navigating and selecting 41 starting 41 connecting to a WLAN 17 corporate WLAN connection 17 critical battery level 29 customer support, accessibility 51 D data transfer 25 digital pen pairing button 10 digital pen buttons, identifying 10 digital pen light, identifying 10 digital pen pairing button, identifying 10 Disk Cleanup software 36 Disk Defragmenter software 36 display components 5 E electrostatic discharge 46 esc key, identifying 11 eSIM 18 external power, using 30 F factory-sealed battery 30, 32 firewall software 34 fn key, identifying 11 fn lock light, identifying 8 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 22 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 22 G gesture 22 GPS 18 H hardware, locating 3 high-definition devices, connecting 25 hot keys break 13 pause 13 programming query 13 using 13 HP Assistive Policy 47 HP Fast Charge 29 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 42 starting 42 using 42 HP resources 1 I initiating Sleep 27 input power 44 internal microphones, identifying 5 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 48 mute volume action key 12 N next track action key 12 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo 4 K keyboard and optional mouse using 23 keyboard backlight action key 12 keys action 11 esc 11 fn 11 Windows 11 keys, action 11 L labels Bluetooth 13 regulatory 13 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 13 WLAN 13 left side components 4 lights AC adapter and battery 3, 4 battery 3, 4 camera 5 caps lock 8 digital pen 10 fn lock 8 power 8 privacy key 8 low battery level 29 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 updating programs and drivers 36 managing power 27 Miracast 25 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 23 operating environment 44 P passwords administrator 32 BIOS administrator 32, 33, 34 user 32 pause action key 12 pen pocket, identifying 10 play action key 12 ports USB Type-C 3, 4, 25 power battery 28 external 30 power button, identifying 9 power icon, using 28 power lights 8 power settings, using 28 precision touchpad using 20 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 22 four-finger tap 22 three-finger swipe 22 three-finger tap 21 two-finger slide 21 two-finger tap 21 privacy key light 8 privacy screen action key, identifying 11 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 17 R recovery 40 recovery media 40 creating using Windows tools 40 regulatory information regulatory label 13 wireless certification labels 13 resources, accessibility 50 restoring 40 right side components 3 S screen brightness action keys 12 Section 508 accessibility standards 49 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 setup utility navigating and selecting 41 shipping the computer 38 shutdown 28 SIM card tray, identifying 9 SIM card, correct size 15 SIM card, inserting 14, 15 Sleep exiting 27 initiating 27 Sleep, initiating 27 software antivirus 34 Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 firewall 34 software installed, locating 3 software updates, installing 35 sound. See audio sound settings, using 24 speaker volume action keys 12 speaker, identifying 4 speakers, identifying 9 special keys, using 10 standards and legislation, accessibility 49 system restore 40 system restore point, creating 40 T tap touchpad and touch screen gesture 20 three-finger swipe touchpad gesture 22 three-finger tap touchpad gesture 21 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 23 touchpad settings 6 using 20 Index 53 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 20 two-finger pinch zoom 20 wireless button 16 wireless certification label 13 wireless controls button 16 operating system 16 wireless key 16 wireless light 16 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 17 corporate WLAN connection 17 functional range 17 public WLAN connection 17 WLAN antennas, identifying 5 WLAN device 13 WLAN label 13 WWAN antennas, identifying 5 WWAN device 16, 17 touchpad buttons identifying 7 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 22 four-finger tap 22 three-finger swipe 22 three-finger tap 21 two-finger slide 21 two-finger tap 21 touchpad zone, identifying 7 transfer data 25 traveling with the computer 13, 38 turning off the computer 28 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 20 two-finger slide touchpad gesture 21 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 21 U unresponsive system 28 updating programs and drivers 36 USB Type-C port, connecting 25 USB Type-C port, identifying 3, 4 user password 32 using passwords 31 using the keyboard and optional mouse 23 using the touchpad 20 V video 25 wireless displays 25 volume adjusting 12 mute 12 W Windows backup 40 recovery media 40 system restore point 40 Windows Hello using 34 Windows key, identifying 11 Windows tools, using 40 wireless action key 12 wireless antennas, identifying 5 54 Index

Valitse verkkokuvake tehtvpalkin oikeasta alakulmasta ja muodosta yhteys johonkin kytettviss olevaan verkkoon. WLAN-verkon mrittmist ja Internet-yhteyden muodostamista varten tarvitset laajakaistamodeemin (DSL- tai kaapelimodeemi, hankittava erikseen), joltakin Internet-palveluntarjoajalta hankittavan Internet-palvelun ja langattoman reitittimen (hankittava erikseen). For at f vist de seneste oplysninger, der er tilgngelige for din nye computer, herunder vejledninger, opdateringer, tilbehr, rengring, opgraderinger og mere, skal du g til http://www.hp.com/support og flge anvisningerne for at finde dit produkt. Vlg derefter Brugervejledninger. Disken User Guides (Brugervejledninger) flger med visse produkter. Sg I sgefeltet p proceslinjen begynder du at skrive navnet p en app, en indstilling, en fil eller et internetemne. Setup Instructions Asennusohjeet

Installationsanvisningar

Opstningsanvisninger

Installeringsveiledning

1 3 2 3 1 Your computer has a preinstalled battery. Before you press the power button to turn on the computer for the first time, be sure that the AC adapter is connected to the computer. Din computer har et forudinstalleret batteri. Fr du trykker p tnd/sluk-knappen for at tnde computeren frste gang, skal du srge for, at vekselstrmsadapteren er sluttet til computeren. Datamaskinen har et forhndsinstallert batteri. Fr du trykker p av/p-knappen for sl datamaskinen p for frste gang, m du passe p at strmadapteren er koblet til datamaskinen. Tietokoneessa on valmiiksi asennettu akku. Ennen kuin painat virtapainiketta tietokoneen kynnistmiseksi ensimmisen kerran, varmista, ett verkkovirtalaite on liitetty tietokoneeseen. Din dator har ett frinstallerat batteri. Innan du trycker p strmknappen fr att starta datorn frsta gngen ska du se till att ntadaptern r ansluten till datorn. 2 Velg nettverksikonet i hyre hjrne p oppgavelinjen, og koble deretter til et av de tilgjengelige nettverkene. Nr du skal konfigurere et trdlst nettverk (WLAN) og koble til Internett, trenger du et bredbndsmodem (DSL eller kabel, kjpes separat), en Internett-tjeneste kjpt fra en Internett-leverandr og en trdls ruter (kjpes separat). Select the network icon in the lower-right corner of the taskbar, and then connect to one of the available networks. To set up a WLAN and connect to the internet, you need a broadband modem (DSL or cable, purchased separately), internet service purchased from an internet service provider, and a wireless router (purchased separately). Vlg netvrksikonet i proceslinjens nederste hjre hjrne, og opret derefter forbindelse til et af de tilgngelige netvrk. For at opstte et WLAN og oprette forbindelse til internettet skal du have et bredbndsmodem (DSL eller kabel, kbes separat), en internetforbindelse, kbt hos en internetudbyder, og en trdls router (kbes separat). 1 2 1 7 6 3 4 5 Vlj ntverksikonen i aktivitetsfltets nedre hgra hrn och anslut sedan till ngot av de tillgngliga ntverken. Om du vill konfigurera ett WLAN och ansluta till internet behver du ett bredbandsmodem (DSL eller kabel, kps separat), en internettjnst bestlld frn en internetleverantr samt en trdls router (kps separat). 98

q w e r 1 Internal microphones (2) 2 Camera 3 Wireless antenna(s)*

4 Power button 5 Fingerprint reader*

6 Touchpad 7 Windows key 8 HDMI port 9 USB Type-C power connector port with HP Sleep and Charge

- Vent q Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) combo jack w Memory card reader*

e USB ports (2) r Power connector 1 Indbyggede mikrofoner (2) 2 Kamera 3 Antenne(r) til trdls*

4 Tnd/sluk-knap 5 Fingeraftrykslser*

6 Touchpad 7 Windows-tast 8 HDMI-port 9 USBType-C-strmstiksport med HPSleepogCharge

- Luftkanal q Kombinationsstik til lydudgang 1 Interne mikrofoner (2) 2 Kamera 3 Trdlsantenne(r)*

4 Av/p-knapp 5 Fingeravtrykksleser*

6 Styrepute 7 Windows-tast 8 HDMI-port 9 USB Type-C-strmkontaktport med HP Sleep and Charge

- Luftespalte q Kombinert lydutgang (hodetelefoner) /

(hovedtelefon)/lydindgang (mikrofon) lydinngang (mikrofon) w Hukommelseskortlser*

e USB-porte (2) r Strmstik w Minnekortleser*

e USB-porter (2) r Strmkontakt 1 Sisiset mikrofonit (2) 2 Kamera 3 Langaton antenni / langattomat antennit*

4 Virtapainike 5 Sormenjlkitunnistin*

6 Kosketusalusta 7 Windows-nppin 8 HDMI-portti 9 HP Sleep and Charge -toiminnolla varustettu USB Type-C -virtaliitinportti

- Tuuletusaukko q nilhdn (kuulokkeiden) / nitulon

(mikrofonin) yhdistelmliitnt w Muistikortinlukija*

e USB-portit (2) r Virtaliitin 1 Interna mikrofoner (2) 2 Kamera 3 Trdls(a) antenn(er)*

4 Strmknapp 5 Fingeravtryckslsare*

6 Styrplatta 7 Windows-tangent 8 HDMI-port 9 USB Type-C-strmkontaktport med HP Sleep and Charge

- Ventil q Kombinationsuttag fr ljudutgng

(hrlurar)/ljudingng (mikrofon) w Minneskortlsare*

e USB-portar (2) r Strmkontakt

Find more information Finne mer informasjon Hitta mer information

Find mere information

Listietojen hankkiminen

Windows Start screen Windows-startskrmen

Windows-aloitusnytt

Startskrmen i Windows Startskjermen i Windows

Depending on your product, you can use a keyboard and mouse, a touchpad, or a touch screen to navigate the Windows Start screen. Windows products Linux products To learn more about Windows and to access help topics, select the Start button

(requires a network connection). To access the user guides, type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. To access the user guides, double-click the HP Documents icon on the desktop.

, and then select Tips or Get Help FreeDOS products To access the user guides, select HP Documents on the Boot Menu. To view the latest information available for your new computer, including how-to topics, updates, accessories, cleaning, upgrades, and more, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. A User Guides disc is included with some products. Find Settings Select the Start button

, and then select the Settings icon

. Shut down your computer Select the Start button

, select the Power icon

, and then select Shut down. Display the Start menu Select the Start button

. Search In the taskbar search box, begin typing the name of an app, setting, file, or internet topic. Switch between open apps Select the Task view icon

. Windows-produkter For at f mere at vide om Windows og for at f adgang til hjlpeemner skal du vlge knappen Start Tips eller F hjlp (krver en netvrksforbindelse). Du fr adgang til brugervejledningerne ved at indtaste HP Documentation i sgefeltet p proceslinjen og derefter vlge HP Documentation. og derefter Linux-produkter Du fr adgang til brugervejledningerne ved at dobbeltklikke p ikonet HP-dokumenter p skrivebordet. FreeDOS-produkter F adgang til brugervejledningerne ved at vlge HP-dokumenter i Startmenuen. The features and appearance of the Windows screen vary, depending on the version of the operating system and additional software installed on your computer. Afhngigt af dit produkt kan du bruge et tastatur og en mus, en TouchPad eller en berringsskrm til at navigere p Windows-startskrmen. Find indstillinger Vlg knappen Start og derefter ikonet for Indstillinger

. Sdan lukkes computeren ned Vlg frst knappen Start og derefter Tnd/sluk-ikonet

, og vlg til sidst Luk computeren. Vis startmenuen Vlg knappen Start

. Windows-produkter For lre mer om Windows og f tilgang til hjelpeemner velger du Start-knappen eller F hjelp (krever nettverkstilkobling). Skriv HP Documentation i skefeltet p oppgavelinjen, og velg deretter HP Documentationfor f tilgang til brukerhndbkene.

, og deretter velger du Tips Linux-produkter Dobbeltklikk p HP-dokumenter-ikonet p skrivebordet for f tilgang til brukerhndbkene. FreeDOS-produkter Velg HP-dokumenter fra Oppstart-menyen for f tilgang til brukerhndbkene. Hvis du vil se den nyeste informasjonen som er tilgjengelig for den nye datamaskinen, inkludert fremgangsmter, oppdateringer, tilbehr, rengjring, oppgraderinger og annet, gr du til http://www.hp.com/support og flger instruksjonene for finne produktet ditt. Velg deretter Brukerveiledninger. Platen User Guides (Brukerhndbker) flger med enkelte produkter. Windows-tuotteet Lue lis Windowsista ja kyt ohjeaiheita valitsemalla aloituspainike verkkoyhteyden). Kyttoppaita voidaan kytt kirjoittamalla tehtvpalkin hakuruutuun HP Documentation ja valitsemalla HP Documentation. ja sitten Vihjeet tai Tukipyynt (vaatii Linux-tuotteet Kyttoppaita voidaan kytt kaksoisnapsauttamalla typydll olevaa HP:n asiakirjat -kuvaketta. FreeDOS-tuotteet Kyttoppaita voidaan kytt valitsemalla Kynnistysvalikosta HP:n asiakirjat. Skift mellem bne apps Vlg ikonet for Opgavevisning

. Windows-skrmens funktioner og udseende kan variere afhngigt af versionen af operativsystemet og yderligere programmer installeret p din computer. Avhengig av ditt produkt, kan du bruke tastatur og mus, styrepute eller berringsskjerm til navigere rundt p Windows-startskjermen. Finn innstillinger Velg Start-knappen

, og velg deretter Innstillinger-ikonet

. Sl av datamaskinen Velg Start-knappen

, velg Av/p-ikonet

, og velg deretter Avslutt. Vis Start-menyen Velg Start-knappen

. Sk Begynn skrive navnet p en app, innstilling, fil eller et Internett-emne i skefeltet p oppgavelinjen. Veksle mellom pne apper

. Velg Oppgavevisning-ikonet Funksjonene og utseendet til Windows-skjermen kan variere, avhengig av versjonen til operativsystemet og annen programvare som er installert p datamaskinen din. Tuotteestasi riippuen voit liikkua Windowsin aloitusnytss nppimistn ja hiiren, kosketusalustan tai kosketusnytn avulla. Asetusten etsiminen Valitse aloituspainike ja valitse sitten Asetukset-kuvake

. Tietokoneen sammuttaminen Valitse aloituspainike

, valitse Virta-kuvake ja valitse sitten Sammuta. Voit katsoa uusimpia tietokoneestasi saatavilla olevia tietoja, muun muassa ohjeaiheita, pivityksi, lisvarusteita, tietoja puhdistamisesta ja tuoteparannuksia, siirtymll osoitteeseen http://www.hp.com/support ja etsimll tuotteesi ohjeiden avulla. Valitse sitten Kyttoppaat. Joidenkin tuotteiden mukana toimitetaan User Guides (Kyttoppaat) -levy. Aloitusvalikon avaaminen Valitse aloituspainike

. Windows-produkter Du hittar mer information om Windows och fr tillgng till hjlpavsnitt genom att vlja Start-knappen sedan Tips eller F hjlp (ntverksanslutning krvs). Du kommer t anvndarhandbckerna genom att skriva HP Documentation i aktivitetsfltets skruta och drefter vlja HP Documentation. och Haku Ala kirjoittaa tehtvpalkin hakuruudussa sovelluksen, asetuksen, tiedoston tai Internet-aiheen nime. Vaihtaminen avoimien sovellusten vlill Valitse Tehtvnkym-kuvake

. Windows-nytn toiminnot ja ulkoasu vaihtelevat riippuen kyttjrjestelmn versiosta ja tietokoneellesi asennetuista lisohjelmistoista. Linux-produkter Du kommer t anvndarhandbckerna genom att dubbelklicka p ikonen HP-dokument p skrivbordet. Beroende p din produkt kan du anvnda ett tangentbord och en mus, en styrplatta eller en pekskrm fr att navigera p startskrmen i Windows. FreeDOS-produkter Du kommer t anvndarhandbckerna genom att vlja HP-dokument i Start-menyn. Hitta instllningar Vlj Start-knappen och sedan ikonen Instllningar

. Stnga av datorn Vlj Start-knappen

, sedan ikonen Strm och drefter Stng av. Visa Start-menyn

. Vlj Start-knappen Sk Brja skriva namnet p en app, en instllning, en fil eller ett internetmne i aktivitetsfltets skruta. Vxla mellan ppna appar Vlj ikonen Aktivitetsvy

. Windows-skrmens funktioner och utseende varierar beroende p version av operativsystem och andra program som r installerade p datorn.

* Select products only.

* Kun udvalgte produkter.

* Kun enkelte produkter.

* Vain tietyiss tuotteissa.

* Endast vissa produkter. Actual computer color, features, feature locations, icon labels, and accessories might vary from the image depicted. Computerens faktiske farve, funktioner, placering af funktioner, mrkater for ikoner samt tilbehr kan afvige fra billedet. Datamaskinens faktiske farger, funksjoner, funksjonsplasseringer, ikonetiketter og tilbehr kan variere fra det illustrerte bildet. Tietokoneen vri, ominaisuudet, ominaisuuksien paikat, kuvakkeiden merkinnt ja lisvarusteet voivat poiketa kuvassa esitetyist. Datorns faktiska frg, funktioner, plats fr funktionerna, ikonetiketter och tillbehr kan skilja sig frn bilden. Om du vill visa den senaste informationen som finns tillgnglig fr din nya dator, inklusive instruktionsavsnitt, uppdateringar, tillbehr, rengring, uppgraderingar med mera, gr du till http://www.hp.com/support och fljer anvisningarna fr att hitta din produkt. Vlj sedan Anvndarhandbcker. En skiva med User Guides (Anvndarhandbcker) medfljer vissa produkter. Replace this box with PI statement as per spec.

*M34754-DH2*

M34754-DH2 Gestures for touchpad or touch screen Bevgelser p TouchPad eller berringsskrm Bevegelser for styrepute eller berringsskjerm Kosketusalustan tai kosketusnytn eleet Gester fr styrplatta eller pekskrm Finne systeminformasjon Systeminformasjon er angitt p serviceetiketten, eller du finner den p ett av flgende steder: undersiden av datamaskinen, baksiden av displayet, inne i batteribrnnen eller bak servicedren. Etiketten kan vre i papirform eller trykt p produktet. I enkelte Windows-produkter kan du raskt trykke p tastkombinasjonen fn+esc for vise Systeminformasjon-skjermen. ADVARSEL: Flg nedenstende fremgangsmde for at mindske risikoen for elektrisk std:

Slut netledningen til en stikkontakt med vekselstrm, der altid er let tilgngelig. Hvis netledningen er forsynet med et 3-benet stik, skal du stte ledningen i en 3-benet stikkontakt med jordforbindelse. Yderligere oplysninger omkring sikkerhed, lovgivning, mrkning samt bortskaffelse af batterier finder du i Bemrkninger om lovgivning, sikkerhed og milj, der fulgte med dine brugervejledninger. For at finde brugervejledningerne til din computer bedes du se afsnittet Find mere information p denne plakat. VAROITUS: Voit pienent shkiskun vaaraa toimimalla seuraavasti:

Kytke virtajohto pistorasiaan, johon on aina vaivaton psy. Jos tietokoneen mukana toimitettiin virtajohto, jossa on kolminastainen pistoke, kytke se maadoitettuun kolmireikiseen pistorasiaan. Tietoja turvallisuudesta, sdksist, merkinnist ja akun asianmukaisesta hvittmisest on kyttoppaiden mukana toimitetussa Shktarkastusviranomaisten ilmoitukset ja turvallisuus- ja ympristohjeet -oppaassa. Lydt tietokoneen kyttoppaat toimimalla tmn julkaisun Listietojen hankkiminen -osan ohjeiden mukaan. Tilbakemelding om dette dokumentet For hjelpe oss med forbedre denne dokumentasjonen kan du sende inn forslag, kommentarer eller opplysninger om feil til hp.doc.feedback@hp.com. Inkluder dokumentets delenummer (plassert i nrheten av strekkoden) nr du sender tilbakemeldingen. ADVARSEL: Ls vejledningen Sikkerhed og komfort, der blev leveret sammen med dine brugervejledninger, for at mindske risikoen for alvorlig skade. Her beskrives korrekt indretning af arbejdsplads og korrekt arbejdsstilling, sundhed samt arbejdsvaner for computerbrugere. I vejledningen Sikkerhed og komfort findes ogs vigtige elektriske og mekaniske sikkerhedsoplysninger. Vejledning om Sikkerhed og komfort findes ogs p internettet p adressen http://www.hp.com/ergo. VAROITUS: Lue kyttoppaiden mukana toimitettu Turvallisen ja mukavan tyympristn opas vakavien vammojen vlttmiseksi. Oppaassa kerrotaan tyaseman oikeasta sijoittamisesta, tietokoneen kyttjien suositeltavista tyskentelyasennoista sek terveyteen ja tytapoihin liittyvist seikoista. Turvallisen ja mukavan tyympristn oppaassa on mys trkeit shkiseen ja mekaaniseen turvallisuuteen liittyvi tietoja. Turvallisen ja mukavan tyympristn opas on saatavana mys verkossa osoitteessa http://www.hp.com/ergo. Touchpad or touch screen Styrepute eller berringsskjerm Styrplatta eller pekskrm

TouchPad eller berringsskrm

Kosketusalusta tai kosketusnytt

Touch screen only Kun berringsskjerm Endast pekskrm Kun berringsskrm

Vain kosketusnytt

Kontakt kundesttte G til http://www.hp.com/support for lse et maskinvare- eller programvareproblem. Bruk dette nettstedet til f mer informasjon om produktet ditt, inkludert koblinger til diskusjonsfora og instruksjoner om feilsking. Du kan ogs finne informasjon om hvordan du kontakter HP og pner en stttesak. ADVARSEL: For at mindske risikoen for varmerelaterede skader eller overophedning af computeren m du ikke placere den direkte i skdet eller blokere luftkanalerne. Du m kun bruge computeren p en hrd, plan overflade. Srg for, at luftstrmmen ikke blokeres af en anden hrd overflade, f.eks. en tilstdende printer, eller af en bld overflade, f.eks. puder, tpper eller bekldning. Du m heller ikke lade vekselstrmsadapteren komme i kontakt med huden eller en bld overflade, som f.eks. puder, tpper eller bekldning, under drift. Computeren og vekselstrmsadapteren overholder grnsen for brugertilgngelig overfladetemperatur som defineret af relevante standarder for sikkerhed. Under visse forhold eller visse forbrugsmnstre kan du opleve hjere overfladetemperatur. Hvis du oplever get overfladetemperatur, skal du vre forsigtig og flge retningslinjerne i HP's Vejledning om Sikkerhed og komfort. VAROITUS: l pid tietokonetta suoraan syliss tai tuki tietokoneen jhdytysaukkoja. Nin voit vhent lmmn aiheuttamien vammojen sek tietokoneen ylikuumenemisen riski. Kyt tietokonetta vain kovalla ja tasaisella alustalla. l peit tietokoneen ilmanvaihtoa asettamalla tietokoneen viereen valinnaista tulostinta tai muuta vastaavaa kovaa esinett tai tyyny, peittoa, vaatetta tai muuta vastaavaa pehme esinett. l myskn anna verkkovirtalaitteen pst kosketuksiin ihosi tai pehmeiden pintojen, kuten tyynyjen, peittojen tai vaatteiden kanssa kytn aikana. Tietokone ja verkkovirtalaite noudattavat sovellettavissa turvallisuusstandardeissa mritettyj kyttjn ksittelemien pintojen lmptiloja koskevia rajoja. Joissakin olosuhteissa tai tietyiss kyttmalleissa voi olla korkeampia pintalmptiloja. Jos pinnan lmptila on kohonnut, ole varovainen ja noudata HP:n Turvallisen ja mukavan tyympristn oppaassa annettuja ohjeita. Tap or double-tap to select Pinch zoom Tryk eller dobbelttryk for at vlge Trykk eller dobbelttrykk for velge Valitse napauttamalla tai kaksoisnapauttamalla Tryck eller dubbeltryck fr att vlja Knib for at zoome Knip sammen for zoome Nipistyszoomaus Nyp fr att zooma Slide to scroll Glid for at rulle Skyv for rulle Vieritys liuuttamalla Dra fr att rulla Touchpad only

Kun TouchPad

Kun styrepute

Vain kosketusalusta

Endast styrplatta Tap to right-click Slide to navigate Multifeatured gestures Tryk for at hjreklikke Glid for at navigere Bevgelser med flere funktioner Trykk for hyreklikke Skyv for navigere Bevegelser med flere funksjoner Kakkospainikkeen napsautus napauttamalla Tryck fr att hgerklicka Navigointi liuuttamalla Usean ominaisuuden eleet Dra fr att navigera Gester med flera funktioner For details about multifeatured gestures, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Some computers support a touchscreen, but some computers, apps, and files might not support all touch gestures. Vlg Start, Indstillinger, Enheder og derefter TouchPad for at f flere oplysninger om bevgelser med flere funktioner. Nogle computere understtter berringsskrm, men visse computere, apps og filer understtter muligvis ikke alle berringsbevgelser. For mer informasjon om bevegelser med flere funksjoner velger du Start, Innstillinger, Enheter og deretter Styrepute. Noen datamaskiner sttter en berringsskjerm, men enkelte datamaskiner, apper og filer sttter kanskje ikke alle berringsbevegelser. Saat listietoja useita ominaisuuksia kattavista eleist valitsemalla Aloitus, Asetukset, Laitteet ja sitten Kosketuslevy. Jotkin tietokoneet tukevat kosketusnytt, mutta jotkin tietokoneet, sovellukset ja tiedostot eivt vlttmtt tue kaikkia kosketuseleit. Visa mer information om gester med flera funktioner genom att vlja Start, Instllningar, Enheter och sedan Styrplatta. Vissa datorer har std fr pekskrm, men vissa datorer, appar och filer kanske inte stder alla pekgester. Locate system information System information is provided on the service label or found in one of the following locations: the bottom of the computer, the back of the display, inside the battery bay, or beneath the service door. The label may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. In some Windows products, you can briefly press the fn+esc key combination to display the System Information screen. Jrjestelmtietojen paikantaminen Jrjestelmtiedot on ilmoitettu huoltotarrassa, tai ne lytyvt jostakin seuraavista paikoista: tietokoneen pohja, nytn taustapuoli, akkupaikan sispuoli tai huoltoluukun alapuoli. Tiedot voidaan esitt tarroissa tai painettuina tuotteeseen. Joillakin Windows-tuotteilla voit painaa lyhyesti fn+esc-nppinyhdistelm, niin Jrjestelmtiedot-nytt tulee nkyviin. Palautetta tst asiakirjasta Auta meit parantamaan tt asiakirjaa lhettmll ehdotuksia, kommentteja tai tietoja virheist osoitteeseen hp.doc.feedback@hp.com. Liit palautteeseesi mys oppaan osanumero (lhell viivakoodia). Yhteyden ottaminen tukeen Voit ratkaista laitteisto- tai ohjelmisto-ongelmia siirtymll osoitteeseen http://www.hp.com/support. Saat tlt sivustolta listietoja tuotteestasi, esimerkiksi linkkej keskustelufoorumeihin ja ohjeita vianmritykseen. Saat sivustolta mys HP:n yhteystiedot ja voit avata tukipyynnn. Hitta systeminformation Systeminformation str p servicedekalen eller p fljande platser: p undersidan av datorn, p bildskrmens baksida, inuti batterifacket eller under serviceluckan. Dekalen kan vara i pappersformat eller tryckt p produkten. I vissa Windows-produkter kan du trycka hastigt p tangentkombinationen fn+esc fr att visa skrmen Systeminformation. Feedback om detta dokument Du kan hjlpa oss att frbttra detta dokument genom att skicka frslag, kommentarer eller rapporter om fel till hp.doc.feedback@hp.com. Ange dokumentartikelnumret (str bredvid streckkoden) nr du skickar in dina kommentarer. Kontakta support Om du behver lsa ett maskinvaru- eller programvaruproblem besker du http://www.hp.com/support. P denna webbplats hittar du mer information om din produkt, inklusive lnkar till diskussionsforum och instruktioner fr felskning. Du kan ven hitta information om hur du kontaktar HP och ppnar ett supportrende. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. If the power cord has a 3-pin attachment plug, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-pin outlet. For more safety, regulatory, labeling, and battery disposal information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices provided with your user guides. To locate the user guides for your computer, see the Find more information section of this poster. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide provided with your user guides. It describes proper workstation setup, and proper posture, health, and work habits for computer users. The Safety & Comfort Guide also provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. The Safety & Comfort Guide is also available on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo. WARNING: To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, at surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits dened by applicable safety standards. Under some conditions or certain usage models you may experience higher surface temperatures. Should you experience increased surface temperature, please use caution and follow the guidelines in the HP Safety & Comfort Guide. SIMPLIFIED DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY The Regulatory Model Number (RMN) for this equipment is TPN-W147. Feedback on this document To help us improve this document, please send any suggestions, comments, or errors to hp.doc.feedback@hp.com. Include the document part number (located near the bar code) when submitting your feedback. Hereby, HP declares that this equipment is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. To view the Declaration of Conformity for this equipment, go to www.hp.eu/certificates and search using this equipments RMN. UK: Hereby, HP declares that this equipment is in compliance with the relevant statutory requirements. To view the Declaration of Conformity for this equipment, go to www.hp.eu/certificates and search using this equipments RMN. Contact support To resolve a hardware or software problem, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Use this site to get more information about your product, including links to discussion forums and instructions on troubleshooting. You can also find information about how to contact HP and open a support case. Find systemoplysninger Systemoplysningerne findes enten p servicemrkaten eller p et af flgende steder: i bunden af computeren, bag p skrmen, inden i batterirummet eller under servicedkslet. Mrkaten kan vre i papirform eller prget p produktet. I nogle Windows-produkter kan du kortvarigt trykke tastkombinationen fn+esc for at f vist skrmen Systemoplysninger. SOFTWARE TERMS By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product

(hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. LIMITED WARRANTY In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. Sdan giver du feedback til dette dokument Hjlp os med at forbedre dette dokument ved at sende eventuelle forslag, kommentarer eller oplysninger om fejl til hp.doc.feedback@hp.com. Medsend dokumentets bestillingsnummer (findes i nrheden af stregkoden), nr du indsender feedback. Your computer is protected by a free subscription to McAfee LiveSafe service for a limited time from the first time you use the computer. You will have the option to purchase McAfee LiveSafe service upon expiration of the subscription. McAfee LiveSafe service helps protect your identity, your data, and your devices with a single subscription.*

* Select products only. Kontakt support For at lse et problem med hardware eller software kan du g ind p http://www.hp.com/support. Brug dette websted til at f mere information om dit produkt, herunder links til diskussionsfora og fejlfindingsanvisninger. Du kan ogs finde oplysninger om, hvordan du kontakter HP og bner en supportsag. FORENKLET OVERENSSTEMMELSESERKLRING Udstyrets regulatoriske modelnummer (RMN) er TPN-W147. HP erklrer hermed, at dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU. Du finder dette udstyrs overensstemmelseserklring ved at g til www.hp.eu/certificates og sge efter udstyrets RMN. VILKR VEDRRENDE SOFTWARE Nr du installerer, kopierer, downloader eller p anden vis bruger de softwareprodukter, der er forudinstalleret p denne computer, accepterer du vilkrene i HP-slutbrugerlicensaftalen (EULA). Hvis du ikke accepterer disse licensbetingelser, er din eneste befjelse at returnere hele det ubrugte produkt (hardware og software) inden for 14 dage mod fuld tilbagebetaling, der er underlagt forhandlerens tilbagebetalingspolitik. For yderligere oplysninger eller for at anmode om fuld tilbagebetaling af computerens pris bedes du kontakte forhandleren. BEGRNSET GARANTI For nogle landes eller omrders vedkommende kan der vre vedlagt en trykt garanti fra HP i kassen. I de lande/omrder, hvor garantien ikke findes i trykt format, kan du anmode om et eksemplar p http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. Hvis produktet er kbt i Asien/Stillehavsomrdet, kan du skrive til HP, POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Angiv produktnavnet samt dit navn, telefonnummer og postadresse. Din computer er beskyttet af et gratis abonnement p tjenesten McAfee LiveSafe i en begrnset periode, som starter, nr du tager din computer i brug for frste gang. Du vil have mulighed for at kbe McAfee LiveSafe-tjenesten, nr abonnementet udlber. McAfee LiveSafe-

tjenesten hjlper med at beskytte din identitet, dine data og dine enheder i t samlet abonnement.*

* Kun udvalgte produkter. YKSINKERTAISTETTU VAATIMUSTENMUKAISUUSVAKUUTUS Laitteen sdsten mukainen mallinumero (RMN) on TPN-W147. Tten HP vakuuttaa, ett tm laite on direktiivin 2014/53/EU vaatimusten mukainen. Voit lukea tmn laitteen vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutuksen siirtymll osoitteeseen www.hp.eu/certificates ja suorittamalla haun laitteen sdsten mukaisella mallinumerolla. OHJELMISTON KYTTEHDOT Asentamalla, kopioimalla, lataamalla tai muuten kyttmll mit tahansa thn tietokoneeseen esiasennettua ohjelmistotuotetta suostut noudattamaan HP:n kyttoikeussopimuksen (EULA) ehtoja. Jos et hyvksy nit kyttoikeusehtoja, ainoa korvausvaihtoehtosi on palauttaa kyttmtn tuote kokonaisuudessaan (sek laitteisto ett ohjelmisto) 14 pivn kuluessa, jolloin tuotteen koko ostohinta palautetaan sinulle myyjn hyvityskytnnn mukaan. Jos tarvitset listietoja tai haluat pyyt tietokoneen koko ostohinnan palauttamista, ota yhteytt myyjn. RAJOITETTU TAKUU Joissakin maissa tai joillakin alueilla HP voi toimittaa takuun painetussa muodossa tuotteen mukana. Jos takuuta ei maassasi tai alueellasi toimiteta painettuna, voit pyyt kopion osoitteesta http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. Jos tuote on ostettu Aasian ja Tyynenmeren alueelta, voit kirjoittaa HP:lle osoitteeseen POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Liit mukaan tuotenimi, oma nimesi, puhelinnumerosi sek postiosoitteesi. Tietokoneesi on suojattu McAfee LiveSafe -ohjelmiston ilmaisella tilauksella rajoitetun ajan alkaen tietokoneesi ensimmisest kytthetkest. Voit hankkia maksullisen McAfee LiveSafe -palvelun ilmaisen tilauksen ptytty. Tilaamalla McAfee LiveSafe -palvelun voit kerralla suojata sek henkiltietosi, muut tietosi ett laitteesi.*

* Vain tietyiss tuotteissa. ADVARSEL: Slik reduserer du faren for elektrisk stt:

Koble strmledningen til en stikkontakt som alltid er lett tilgjengelig. Hvis strmledningen har et trepolet stpsel, setter du ledningen inn i en jordet, trepolet stikkontakt. Du finner mer informasjon om sikkerhet, lovgivning, merking og kassering av batterier i Opplysninger om forskrifter, sikkerhet og milj, som flger med brukerhndbkene. Se Finne mer informasjon p denne plakaten for finne brukerhndbkene til datamaskinen. ADVARSEL: Les hndboken Sikkerhet og komfort som flger med brukerhndbkene, for redusere faren for alvorlig skade. Den beskriver hvordan du konfigurerer og bruker datamaskinen p en mte som sikrer gode arbeidsvaner og hindrer og forebygger helseskade. I Sikkerhet og komfort finner du ogs viktige opplysninger om elektrisk og mekanisk sikkerhet. Hndboken Sikkerhet og komfort er tilgjengelig p internett p nettadressen http://www.hp.com/ergo. ADVARSEL: For redusere risikoen for varmerelatert skade eller overoppheting av datamaskinen m du ikke ha datamaskinen i fanget eller dekke til datamaskinens luftespalter. Plasser datamaskinen p en fast, plan flate nr du skal bruke den. Pass p at harde gjenstander som f.eks. en tilkoblet skriver, eller myke gjenstander som puter eller tepper o.l., ikke blokkerer luftstrmmen. La heller ikke strmadapteren komme i kontakt med hud eller myke gjenstander, som f.eks. puter og tepper, under bruk. Datamaskinen og strmadapteren overholder temperaturgrensen for brukertilgjengelige overflater, definert av gjeldende sikkerhetsstandarder. Under enkelte forhold eller med visse bruksmodeller kan du oppleve hyere overflatetemperaturer. Hvis du opplever kt overflatetemperatur, m du vre forsiktig og flge retningslinjene i HP-hndboken Sikkerhet og komfort. FORENKLET SAMSVARSERKLRING Forskriftsmodellnummer (RMN) for dette utstyret er TPN-W147. HP erklrer med dette at dette utstyret overholder direktiv 2014/53/EU. Hvis du vil se samsvarserklringen for dette utstyret, kan du g til www.hp.eu/certificates og ske med utstyrets RMN. VILKR FOR PROGRAMVAREN Ved installere, kopiere, laste ned eller p annen mte bruke et programvareprodukt som er forhndsinstallert p datamaskinen, samtykker du i vilkrene i HPs lisensavtale for sluttbrukere (EULA). Hvis du ikke godtar vilkrene i lisensavtalen, er ditt eneste rettsmiddel returnere det ubrukte produktet (maskinvare og programvare) i sin helhet innen 14 dager for f full refusjon i henhold til forhandlerens refusjonspolitikk. Ta kontakt med forhandleren for f mer informasjon eller be om full refusjon av datamaskinens kjpesum. BEGRENSET GARANTI I enkelte land eller regioner kan HP legge ved en trykt utgave av garantien i esken. I land eller regioner hvor garantien ikke ligger ved i trykt format, kan du be om f et trykt eksemplar fra http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For produkter som er kjpt i stillehavsdelen av Asia, kan du skrive til HP ved POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Legg ved produktnavn, samt navnet ditt, telefonnummer og postadresse. Datamaskinen er beskyttet av et gratis abonnement p McAfee LiveSafe-tjenesten i et begrenset tidsrom fra du bruker den for frste gang. Du fr mulighet til kjpe McAfee LiveSafe-tjenesten ved utlp av abonnementet. McAfee LiveSafe-tjenesten bidrar til beskytte personlige opplysninger, data og enheter med ett enkelt abonnement.*

* Kun enkelte produkter. VARNING: S hr minskar du risken fr elsttar:

Anslut strmkabeln till ett eluttag som alltid r enkelt att komma t. Har strmkabeln en jordad kontakt ska kabeln anslutas till ett jordat uttag. Om du vill ha mer information om skerhet, freskrifter, mrkning och om hur du kasserar batterier kan du lsa de Reglerings-, skerhets- och miljfreskrifter som medfljer anvndarhandbckerna. Du hittar anvndarhandbckerna till din dator med hjlp av avsnittet Hitta mer information p den hr affischen. VARNING: Minska risken fr allvarliga skador genom att lsa handboken Skerhet och arbetsmilj som medfljer anvndarhandbckerna. I den beskrivs instllningar av arbetsstationen, sittstllningar vid datorn och sunda datorvanor. I Handbok fr Skerhet och arbetsmilj finns ven viktig information om elektrisk och mekanisk skerhet. Handboken Skerhet och arbetsmilj finns ven p ntet p http://www.hp.com/ergo. VARNING: Minska risken fr vrmeskador eller verhettning genom att inte ha datorn direkt i knet eller blockera datorns luftventiler. Anvnd bara datorn p en hrd, plan yta. Se till att ingen hrd yta som en nrliggande skrivare, eller mjuka ytor som kuddar, mattor eller kldesplagg, blockerar luftfldet. Lt inte heller ntadaptern komma i kontakt med huden eller ngon mjuk yta, t.ex. kuddar, mattor eller kldesplagg, under drift. Datorn och ntadaptern efterlever temperaturbegrnsningarna enligt vad som faststlls i tillmpliga skerhetsstandarder. Under vissa frhllanden eller med vissa anvndarmodeller kan du uppleva hgre yttemperaturer. Flj riktlinjerna i HP-handboken Skerhet och arbetsmilj om du upplever hgre yttemperaturer. FRENKLAD FRSKRAN OM VERENSSTMMELSE Det regulatoriska modellnumret (RMN) fr utrustningen r TPN-W147. HP frskrar hrmed att denna utrustning verensstmmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU. Om du vill se en verensstmmelsefrklaring fr denna utrustning besker du www.hp.eu/certificates och sker med hjlp av utrustningens RMN. VILLKOR FR PROGRAMVARAN Genom att installera, kopiera, hmta eller p annat stt anvnda ngot av de frinstallerade programvaruprodukterna p den hr datorn samtycker du till att flja villkoren i HPs licensavtal fr slutanvndare (EULA). Om du inte accepterar dessa licensvillkor r din enda ersttning att returnera den oanvnda produkten i sin helhet (bde maskinvara och programvara) inom 14 dagar fr en full terbetalning enligt sljarens terbetalningspolicy. Om du vill ha mer information eller vill begra full terbetalning av priset fr datorn ska du vnda dig till sljaren. BEGRNSAD GARANTI I vissa lnder eller regioner medfljer ett tryckt exemplar av HPs garanti i frpackningen. I lnder eller regioner dr garantiinformationen inte ges i tryckt format kan du bestlla ett exemplar p http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. r produkten kpt i Asien eller Stillahavsomrdet kan du skriva till HP p adressen POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Ange produktnamn, ditt namn, ditt telefonnummer och din postadress. Datorn skyddas med ett kostnadsfritt tidsbegrnsat abonnemang p McAfee LiveSafe, som aktiveras frsta gngen du anvnder datorn. Nr abonnemanget upphr har du mjlighet att kpa McAfee LiveSafe-tjnsten. Med tjnsten McAfee LiveSafe kan du skydda din identitet, dina data och dina enheter med ett och samma abonnemang.*

* Endast vissa produkter. Copyright 2021 HP Development Company, L.P. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries. McAfee LiveSafe is a trademark of McAfee, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. USB Type-C and USB-C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com for details. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Second Edition: May 2021 First Edition: February 2021

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. Copyright 20182021 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. WiGig is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Eighth Edition: April 2021 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-008 About this guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About this guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union and UK regulatory notices .......................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 LAN 802.11 //: ......................................................................... 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 10 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 10 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 11 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 11 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 11 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 13 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 14 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 14 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 15 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 16 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 16 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 16 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 16 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 16 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 China ................................................................................................................................ 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 17 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 18 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 18 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 18 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 18 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 20 China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 20 China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 20 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 20 Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 21 vi

....................................................................................................................... 21 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 22 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 22 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 22 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 22 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 23 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 23 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 23 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 25 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 25 China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 29

................................................... 29

............................................................................................................................................... 30

(RoHS) ..................................................... 32

....................................................................................................... 32

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 33

....................................................................................................... 33 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 34 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 34 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 35 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 35 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 35 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 35 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 36 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 38 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and 1 used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Brazil notice Canada notices Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Para maiores informaes, consulte o site da ANATEL www.anatel.gov.br. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union and UK regulatory notices The European Union and UK have their own set of regulatory notices. Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking and UK marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and UK and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives and the equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. Brazil notice 3 The full EU and UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters: Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) Use this notice when you need to provide EMF data for radio operation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) Some products in some countries have restrictions on radio function. IMPORTANT:

IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) The table shows radio frequency bands and maximum power levels for some products and some countries. Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 5G NR (450 MHz7125 MHz) 100 10 100 200 400 RFID; 865-868 MHz/915-921 MHz 2000/4000 WWAN 5G NR (24250 MHz52600 MHz) 316.230 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) (continued) Radio Technology Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Ergonomics notice 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Please pay attention when installing a dedicated Tower, Micro Tower Business Desktop PC or Workstation that is not intended to be installed/used in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid annoying reflections at visual display workplaces, this device must not be placed in the direct field of view. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Japan notice V-2 B VCCI-B VCCI32-1 B VCCI-B 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Aviso sobre conexiones inalmbricas para Mxico:

En el caso de PC de escritorio, equipos All-in-One, terminales de punto de venta, thin clients y workstations en uso normal e instalados con un dispositivo de transmisin y recepcin de radio, una distancia de separacin de 20 cm garantiza que los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia cumplan con los requisitos de Mxico. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices The following notices apply to Taiwan. Singapore wireless notice 7 LAN 802.11 //:

Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance Use this notice to warn of possible radiation exposure from incorrect laser usage. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices U.S. modem statements Canada, Japan, New Zealand, and the U.S. have their own sets of modem notices. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. Telecommunications device approvals 9 The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Macrovision Corporation notice 11 Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Your product documentation might require one or more of these safety notices. Important safety information These notices could apply to many products. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Important safety information 13 IMPORTANT:

If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice Use this notice if injury from excessive heat is a possibility. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. Potential safety conditions notice Use this notice to warn users about the possibility that a failure was not safe and controlled. If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Use this notice when the sound pressure level might be lower than recommended or expected. Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. One or more of these safety notices might apply to your product's battery. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Acoustics notice Battery notices 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Table 2-1 Battery disposal icon and description Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices Use one or more of these notices to warn users about the dangers of injuries from spinning fan blades. WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice This notice warns about the danger of high volume settings for headsets and earphones. Fan notices 15 WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Different countries have different requirements for power supplies and power cords. Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. China For use in Norway CCC Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. Power cord set requirements One or more of these notices might apply to your product's power cord. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. DC plug of external HP power supply The diagram illustrates the DC plug of external HP power supply. Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard Use this notice to warn about the possibility of pinching injuries. WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection Several safety notices might apply to TV antenna connectors. External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 2-2 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice Use this notice to warn about the possibility of serious injury from voltage converter kits. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Travel notice 19 China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m 2000m China tropical warning notice Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner Norway and Sweden require a galvanic isolator for grounding. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice This eyesight notice applies to products in Taiwan.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Taiwan eyesight notice 21 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Use this notice to explain the icon associated with waste disposal. Table 3-1 Disposal of waste equipment icon and its description Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Brazil hardware recycling information No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Taiwan battery recycling information This notice provides the regulations for battery manufacture and recycling in Taiwan. Table 3-2 Taiwan battery recycling icon and its description Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Taiwan battery recycling information 23 Table 3-3 Preset power management features when the computer is operating on AC power Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label China requires this notice of energy efficiency. In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 25 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Table 3-4 Typical Energy Consumption (TEC) values Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Table 3-5 Product category and configuration description Product Type Configuration Description Category A Category B Category C Category D Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China RoHS China uses the following notices for RoHS. Table 3-6

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 29 Table 3-6 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

/Java USB USB SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Table 3-7

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 China RoHS 31 Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS

(Cr(VI))

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory

(RoHS) 33 Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016."

It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 The European Union requires this notice about power consumption. To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices IT ECO declarations Use these links to provide locations for IT ECO declarations. http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Notebook or tablet PCs Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 1 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. IT ECO declarations 35 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified Edge 37 Index Symbols/Numerics 32, 33 32, 33 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 20 Aviso para o Brasil 3 avisos Brasil 3 B battery 14 battery notice 8, 22 battery recycling 22 Belarus regulatory notice 2 Brazil notice 3, 16 C cable grounding notice 20 Canada modem statement 10 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 25 China PC energy label 25 D disposal notices battery 22 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 22 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 22 ENERGY STAR certification 23 environmental notices 22 equipment disposal notice 22 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 34 38 Index F fan notice 15 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 15 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 34 J Japan modem statement 10 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 35 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 8, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 11 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 10 Japan 10 New Zealand 11 U.S. 9 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 11 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 14, 22 Belarus regulatory 2 Brazil 3, 16 Canada 3 environmental 22 equipment disposal 22 ergonomics 5 fan 15 headset and earphone volume level 15 India restriction of hazardous substances 34 Japan 6 Japan power cord 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 35 laser safety 8, 16 Macrovision Corporation 11 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 7 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 19 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 22 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 7 TCO Certified Certification 35 TCO Certified Edge Certification 36 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 19 tropical warning notice 20 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 20 U U.S. modem statement 9 V voice support 11 volume level notice, headset and earphone 15 W wireless LAN devices 2 Index 39

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. Copyright 20182021 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. WiGig is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Ninth Edition: December 2021 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-009 About this guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About this guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Wireless devices with 5.925 GHz7.125 GHz ...................................................................................... 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 3 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union and UK regulatory notices .......................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 4 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 6 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 8 LAN 802.11 //: ......................................................................... 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 v Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 10 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 10 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 11 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 11 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 12 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 13 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 14 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 14 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 15 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 16 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 16 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 16 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 16 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 16 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 China ................................................................................................................................ 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 17 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 18 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 18 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 18 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 18 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 20 China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 20 China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 20 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 20 vi Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 21

....................................................................................................................... 21 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 22 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 22 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 22 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 22 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 23 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 23 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 23 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 25 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 25 China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 29

................................................... 29

............................................................................................................................................... 30

(RoHS) ..................................................... 32

....................................................................................................... 32

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 33

....................................................................................................... 33 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 34 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 34 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 35 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 35 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 35 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 35 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 36 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 38 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and 1 used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. Wireless devices with 5.925 GHz7.125 GHz FCC regulations restrict the operation of this device to indoor use only. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices The operation of this device is prohibited on oil platforms, cars, trains, boats, and aircraft, except that operation of this device is permitted in aircraft while flying above 10,000 feet. The operation of this device is also prohibited for control of or communications with unmanned aircraft systems. Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. Brazil notice Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Para maiores informaes, consulte o site da ANATEL www.anatel.gov.br. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union and UK regulatory notices The European Union and UK have their own set of regulatory notices. Belarus regulatory notice 3 Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking and UK marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and UK and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives and the equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full EU and UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters: Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) Use this notice when you need to provide EMF data for radio operation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) Some products in some countries have restrictions on radio function. IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.15 GHz5.35 GHz and/or Wi-Fi 6E Low Power Indoor 5.945 IMPORTANT:

GHz6.425 GHz (or 5.925 GHz6.425 GHz in UK) frequency bands are restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) The table shows radio frequency bands and maximum power levels for some products and some countries. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2.4 GHz NFC; 13.56 MHz RFID; 865868 MHz/915921 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2.4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11ax; 6 GHz WWAN 5G NR (450 MHz7125 MHz) WWAN 5G NR (24250 MHz52600 MHz) WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) 100 10 2000/4000 100 200 EU: 200/25 (LPI/VLP) UK: 250/25 (LPI/VLP) 400 316.230 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. Ergonomics notice When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Please pay attention when installing a dedicated Tower, Micro Tower Business Desktop PC or Workstation that is not intended to be installed/used in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid annoying reflections at visual display workplaces, this device must not be placed in the direct field of view. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every European Union and UK regulatory notices 5 PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Japan notice V-2 B VCCI-B VCCI32-1 B VCCI-B 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Aviso sobre conexiones inalmbricas para Mxico:

En el caso de PC de escritorio, equipos All-in-One, terminales de punto de venta, thin clients y workstations en uso normal e instalados con un dispositivo de transmisin y recepcin de radio, una distancia de separacin de 20 cm garantiza que los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia cumplan con los requisitos de Mxico. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) Mexico notice 7 This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices The following notices apply to Taiwan. LAN 802.11 //:

Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance Use this notice to warn of possible radiation exposure from incorrect laser usage. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices Canada, Japan, New Zealand, and the U.S. have their own sets of modem notices. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. Telecommunications device approvals 9 The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. Modem notices 11 This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Your product documentation might require one or more of these safety notices. Important safety information These notices could apply to many products. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Important safety information 13 IMPORTANT:

If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice Use this notice if injury from excessive heat is a possibility. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of heat-related injuries, do not touch internal hot surfaces until internal surfaces have cooled down to room temperature. Potential safety conditions notice Use this notice to warn users about the possibility that a failure was not safe and controlled. If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Acoustics notice Use this notice when the sound pressure level might be lower than recommended or expected. Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. Battery notices One or more of these safety notices might apply to your product's battery. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. WARNING!

from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Table 2-1 Battery disposal icon and description Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices Use one or more of these notices to warn users about the dangers of injuries from spinning fan blades. WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice This notice warns about the danger of high volume settings for headsets and earphones. Fan notices 15 WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Different countries have different requirements for power supplies and power cords. Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. China CCC For use in Norway Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. Power cord set requirements One or more of these notices might apply to your product's power cord. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. DC plug of external HP power supply The diagram illustrates the DC plug of external HP power supply. Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard Use this notice to warn about the possibility of pinching injuries. WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection Several safety notices might apply to TV antenna connectors. External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 2-2 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice Use this notice to warn about the possibility of serious injury from voltage converter kits. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Travel notice 19 China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m 2000m China tropical warning notice Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner Norway and Sweden require a galvanic isolator for grounding. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice This eyesight notice applies to products in Taiwan.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Taiwan eyesight notice 21 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Use this notice to explain the icon associated with waste disposal. Table 3-1 Disposal of waste equipment icon and its description Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Brazil hardware recycling information No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Taiwan battery recycling information This notice provides the regulations for battery manufacture and recycling in Taiwan. Table 3-2 Taiwan battery recycling icon and its description Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Taiwan battery recycling information 23 Table 3-3 Preset power management features when the computer is operating on AC power Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label China requires this notice of energy efficiency. In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 25 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Table 3-4 Typical Energy Consumption (TEC) values Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Table 3-5 Product category and configuration description Product Type Configuration Description Category A Category B Category C Category D Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. GB28380-2012 China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China RoHS China uses the following notices for RoHS. Table 3-6

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE)

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 29 Table 3-6 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

/Java USB USB X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS Table 3-7

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O

(Cr(VI)) O O O O O O

(PBB)

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O 30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-7 (continued) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 China RoHS 31 Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE)

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE)

(RoHS) 33 Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016."

It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 The European Union requires this notice about power consumption. To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices IT ECO declarations Use these links to provide locations for IT ECO declarations. Notebook or tablet PCs http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 1 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. See https://tcocertified.com/product-finder/ to see a list of TCO Certified products. IT ECO declarations 35 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. See https://tcocertified.com/product-finder/ to see a list of TCO Certified Edge products. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified Edge 37 Index Symbols/Numerics 32, 33 32, 33 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 20 Aviso para o Brasil 3 avisos Brasil 3 B battery 14 battery notice 8, 22 battery recycling 22 Belarus regulatory notice 3 Brazil notice 3, 16 C cable grounding notice 20 Canada modem statement 10 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 25 China PC energy label 25 D disposal notices battery 22 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 22 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 22 ENERGY STAR certification 23 environmental notices 22 equipment disposal notice 22 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 34 38 Index F fan notice 15 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 15 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 34 J Japan modem statement 10 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 35 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 8, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 12 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 7 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 10 Japan 10 New Zealand 11 U.S. 9 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 11 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 14, 22 Belarus regulatory 3 Brazil 3, 16 Canada 3 environmental 22 equipment disposal 22 ergonomics 5 fan 15 headset and earphone volume level 15 India restriction of hazardous substances 34 Japan 6 Japan power cord 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 35 laser safety 8, 16 Macrovision Corporation 12 Mexico 7 modem 9 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 8 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 19 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 22 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 8 TCO Certified Certification 35 TCO Certified Edge Certification 36 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 19 tropical warning notice 20 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 20 U U.S. modem statement 9 V voice support 11 volume level notice, headset and earphone 15 W wireless devices 2 wireless LAN devices 2 Index 39

User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides information about components, network connection, power management, security, backing up, and more. Product notice Software terms This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features might not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems might require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees might apply and additional requirements might apply over time for updates. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2020 HP Development Company, L.P. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. Lync, Office 365, Skype, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. USB Type-C and USB-

C are registered trademarks of USB Implementers Forum. Miracast is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: December 2020 Document Part Number: M28701-001 Safety warning notice Reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer by following the practices described. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Getting started ............................................................................................................................................. 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 1 2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right ....................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Left ......................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Keyboard area ........................................................................................................................................................ 6 Touchpad ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Touchpad settings ............................................................................................................. 6 Adjusting touchpad settings .......................................................................... 6 Turning on the touchpad ................................................................................ 6 Touchpad components ...................................................................................................... 6 Lights ................................................................................................................................................... 7 Button, speakers, and SIM card tray ................................................................................................... 8 Using your HP Elite Slim Active Pen .................................................................................................... 9 Special keys ....................................................................................................................................... 10 Action keys ........................................................................................................................................ 11 Hot keys ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Using a SIM card ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Determining the correct SIM card size for your computer ................................................................ 15 Inserting a SIM card in the digital pen pocket ................................................................................... 15 3 Network connections ................................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 16 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 16 Wireless button ............................................................................................................... 16 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 16 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 17 Using HP Mobile Broadband .............................................................................................................. 17 Using eSIM ......................................................................................................................................... 18 Using GPS ........................................................................................................................................... 18 Using Bluetooth wireless devices ...................................................................................................... 18 v Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 18 Connecting to a wired network ............................................................................................................................ 19 4 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 20 Using touchpad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 20 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 20 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 20 Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) ....................................................................... 21 Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ......................................................................... 21 Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ...................................................................... 21 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) ......................................................................... 22 Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) .................................................................. 22 Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) ............................................................................................ 22 One-finger slide (touch screen) ......................................................................................................... 23 Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 23 Using an on-screen keyboard .............................................................................................................................. 23 5 Entertainment features ............................................................................................................................... 24 Using a camera .................................................................................................................................................... 24 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 24 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 24 Viewing or changing sound settings .............................................................................. 24 Using the control panel to view and control audio settings .......................................... 24 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays ........................................... 25 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 25 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port ......................................................................................... 25 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 27 Using Sleep .......................................................................................................................................................... 27 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 28 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 28 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 28 Using HP Fast Charge ........................................................................................................................ 29 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 29 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 29 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 29 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 29 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 29 vi Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 30 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 30 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 30 Running on external power ................................................................................................................................. 30 7 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 31 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 32 Managing a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................ 32 Setting a new BIOS administrator password .................................................................. 32 Changing a BIOS administrator password ...................................................................... 33 Deleting a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................ 33 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 34 Windows Hello ..................................................................................................................................................... 34 Using antivirus software ...................................................................................................................................... 34 Using firewall software ........................................................................................................................................ 34 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 35 8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 36 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 36 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 36 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 36 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 36 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 36 Removing dirt and debris from your computer ................................................................................ 37 Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant ..................................................................................... 37 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 38 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ........................................................................................................... 40 Backing up information and creating recovery media ........................................................................................ 40 Using Windows tools for backing up ................................................................................................. 40 Restoring and recovering your system ............................................................................................................... 40 Creating a system restore ................................................................................................................. 40 Restoring and recovery methods ...................................................................................................... 40 10 Computer Setup (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................... 41 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 41 vii Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 41 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 41 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................................... 42 Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code ........................................................ 42 Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ......................................................................................................... 42 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive ................................................................ 42 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................................................. 43 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ................................ 43 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 44 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 44 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 44 13 Electrostatic discharge ............................................................................................................................... 46 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 47 HP and accessibility ............................................................................................................................................. 47 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 47 The HP commitment ......................................................................................................................... 47 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 48 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 48 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 48 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 48 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 49 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 49 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 49 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 49 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 50 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 50 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 50 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 50 Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 51 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 52 viii 1 Getting started This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and where to find additional HP resources. TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again returns you to the previous screen. Windows key After you set up and register the computer, HP recommends the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Connect to the internetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 16. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 34. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 20 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard driveCreate recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive to back up your hard drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 40. Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Table 1-1 Additional information Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar search box. Then select Support. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information 1 Table 1-1 Additional information (continued) Resource or Contents Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP might provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Getting started 2 Components Your computer features top-rated components. This chapter provides details about your components, where they are located, and how they work. Locating hardware Use these instructions to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Locating software Use these instructions to find out what software is installed on your computer:

Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Right Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the right side of the computer. Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Speaker Battery light

(3) USB Type-C port Description Produces sound. When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent. Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90 percent. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Off: The battery is not charging. Connects a USB device, provides data transfer, and charges small devices when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. Locating hardware 3 Table 2-1 Right-side components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description

(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack NOTE: Cables, adapters, or both (purchased separately) might be required. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Left Use the illustration and table to identify the components on the left side of the computer. Table 2-2 Left-side components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2) USB Type-C port Connects a USB device, provides data transfer, and charges small devices when the computer is on or in Sleep mode. NOTE: Cables, adapters, or both (purchased separately) might be required. Battery light When AC power is connected:

White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent. Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):

Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is not charging.

(3) Speaker Produces sound. 4 Chapter 2 Components Display Use the illustration and table to identify the display components. Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Ambient light sensor*

Camera lights Internal microphones Camera

(5) Camera privacy cover

(6)

(7) WLAN antennas*

WWAN antennas (select products only)*

Detects ambient light in the environment. On: The camera is in use. NOTE: The infrared camera lights are used only during the Windows Hello login procedure. Record sound. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To use your camera, see Using a camera on page 24. Some cameras also allow a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. For more information, see Windows Hello on page 34. NOTE: Camera functions vary depending on the camera hardware and software installed on your product. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWANs).

*The ambient light sensor and antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal WLAN and WWAN transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. Display 5 Table 2-3 Display components and their descriptions (continued) Component Description For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Type HP Documentation in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Documentation. Keyboard area Keyboards can vary by language. Touchpad The touchpad settings and components are described here. Touchpad settings You learn how to adjust the touchpad settings and components here. Adjusting touchpad settings Use these steps to adjust touchpad settings and gestures. 1. Type touchpad settings in the taskbar search box, and then press enter. Choose a setting. 2. Turning on the touchpad Follow these steps to turn on the touchpad. 1. 2. Type touchpad settings in the taskbar search box, and then press enter. Using an external mouse, click the Touchpad button. If you are not using an external mouse, press the Tab key repeatedly until the pointer rests on the touchpad button. Then press the spacebar to select the button. Touchpad components Use the illustration and table to identify the touchpad components. 6 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-4 Touchpad components and their descriptions Component Description Touchpad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using touchpad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 20. Left touchpad button Right touchpad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse.

(1)

(2)

(3) Lights Use the illustration and table to identify the lights on the computer. Keyboard area 7 Table 2-5 Lights and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3) Power light Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Privacy key light (select products only) On: Privacy screen is on, which helps prevent side-angle viewing. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unnecessary components. Off: The computer is off or in Sleep. On: The fn key is locked. For more information, see Hot keys on page 13.

(4) Fn lock light Button, speakers, and SIM card tray Use the illustration and table to identify the button, speakers, and SIM card tray on the computer. 8 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-6 Button, speakers, and SIM card tray and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Speakers SIM card tray (select products only) Power button Description Produce sound. You can insert a SIM card in the SIM tray located inside the pen pocket. For more information, see Using a SIM card on page 14. When the computer is off, press the button briefly to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. IMPORTANT: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Right-click the Power meter icon and then select Power Options. Using your HP Elite Slim Active Pen Use the illustration and table to identify the digital pen and its features. Keyboard area 9 Table 2-7 Digital pen features and their descriptions Component

(1)

(2) Digital pen pocket Bottom button

(3) Top button

(4) Digital pen light

(5) Pairing button Description A recessed area for storing and charging the digital pen. Erases content on the screen. NOTE: You can configure the action of this button in the pen software that is installed on your computer. Press and hold the button and tap the screen to imitate the action of a right-click of your mouse. NOTE: You can configure the action of this button in the pen software that is installed on your computer. Blinking blue (slowly): The pen is in pairing mode. Blinking blue (fast): The pen has paired successfully. Blinking red: The battery charge level is low. Blinking white: The pen is charging. White: The pen is fully charged. To connect your digital pen to your computer, press and hold the pairing button for 5 seconds. For more information, see Connecting Bluetooth devices on page 18. NOTE: You can configure the action of this button in the pen software that is installed on your computer.

*The Regulatory Model Number (RMN) for this equipment is STA-WP01. Turn on your digital pen by tapping the tip on any surface. Special keys Use the illustration and table to identify the special keys. 10 Chapter 2 Components Table 2-8 Special keys and their descriptions Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in conjunction with another key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. See Action keys on page 11. Action keys Action keys perform specific functions and vary by computer. To determine which keys are on your computer, look at the icons on your keyboard and match them to the descriptions in this table. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions Icon Description Helps prevent side-angle viewing from onlookers. If needed, decrease or increase brightness for well-lit or darker environments. Press the key again to turn off the privacy screen. NOTE: To quickly turn on the highest privacy setting, press fn+p. Keyboard area 11 Table 2-9 Action keys and their descriptions (continued) Icon Description Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. Press the key repeatedly to adjust the brightness from high (when you first start up the computer), to low, to off. After you adjust the keyboard backlight setting, the backlight will revert to your previous setting each time you turn on the computer. The keyboard backlight will turn off after 30 seconds of inactivity. To turn the keyboard backlight back on, press any key or tap the touchpad (select products only). To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Switches the screen image among display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing the key alternates the screen image from computer display to monitor display to simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. 12 Chapter 2 Components NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature by pressing and holding the fn key and the left shift key. The fn lock light will turn on. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Hot keys A hot key is the combination of the fn key and another key. Use the table to identify the hot keys. To use a hot key:

Press and hold the fn key, and then press one of the keys listed in the following table. Table 2-10 Hot keys and their descriptions Key Description R S W Breaks the operation. Sends a programing query. Pauses the operation. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you might need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels might be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you might be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of these examples. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Table 2-11 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Warranty period Product ID Serial number Labels 13 Table 2-12 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Table 2-13 Service label components Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) HP product name Product ID Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Using a SIM card Use these instructions to insert a SIM card. IMPORTANT: You can damage the SIM card if you insert the wrong size card or insert it or the SIM card tray in the wrong direction. The card might also become stuck in the slot. Do not use SIM card adapters. To prevent damage to the SIM card or connectors, use minimal force when inserting or removing a SIM card. 14 Chapter 2 Components Determining the correct SIM card size for your computer Before purchasing a SIM card, follow these instructions to determine the correct SIM card size for your computer. 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then search for your computer by product name or number. Select Product Information. Refer to the listed options to determine which card to purchase. Inserting a SIM card in the digital pen pocket To insert a SIM card, follow these steps. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn off the computer by using the Shut down command. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. If the digital pen is present, remove it from the pocket. Insert the SIM card into the SIM card tray, and then insert the tray into the slot, and then press in on the SIM card tray until it is firmly seated. IMPORTANT: Do not use the digital pen to insert or remove the SIM card tray from the slot. NOTE: Your SIM card, SIM card tray, or the SIM card slot in your computer might look different from the illustration in this section. NOTE: Your SIM card slot might have an icon to show which way the card should be inserted into the computer. Using a SIM card 15 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites by using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter helps you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer is equipped with multiple wireless devices. WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 m (approximately 33 ft) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features. Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer has a wireless button and two wireless devices. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Network and Sharing Center. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. 16 Chapter 3 Network connections Connecting to a WLAN Before you can connect to a WLAN with this procedure, you must first set up internet access. NOTE: When you are setting up internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an internet service provider (ISP). To purchase internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the internet service. 1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. If no WLANs are listed, you might be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN that you want to connect to:

NOTE:

NOTE:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Change your network settings section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, which allows you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 3. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI number, MEID number, or both to activate mobile broadband service. The number is printed on a label located on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it might be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information that is included with your computer or the mobile network operator might provide it separately from the computer. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Connecting to a wireless network 17 For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using eSIM Your computer supports the use of an eSIM. An eSIM is a programmable version of the commonly used SIM that you can use to download different profiles from selected carriers. An eSIM lets you connect to the internet over a cellular data connection. With an eSIM, you do not need to get a SIM card from your mobile operator, and you can quickly switch between mobile operators and data plans. For example, you might have one cellular data plan for work and a different plan with another mobile operator for personal use. If you travel, you can connect in more places by finding mobile operators with plans in that area. You can implement eSIMs in two ways:

The eSIM chip can be embedded (eUICC). The notebook then operates as a dual SIM, one as eUICC and the second as standard micro or nano SIM card on a SIM card tray. Only one SIM can be active at a time. A removable physical eSIM is placed on a SIM card tray like a standard micro or nano SIM card, but the eSIM is not limited to a single carrier (physical blank eSIM). You must add an eSIM profile to connect to the internet using cellular data. To add a profile, manage SIM profiles, and learn how to use an eSIM, go to https://www.support.microsoft.com , and type Use an eSIM in the search bar. Using GPS Your computer is equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, be sure that location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. 2. Using Bluetooth wireless devices Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices. Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Digital pen Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 18 Chapter 3 Network connections 1. 2. 3. 4. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device that you are adding, If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth is turned on for that device. Some NOTE:

follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, see the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices might have additional requirements; see the documentation provided with the device. NOTE: The digital pen included with your computer does not automatically pair during the intial setup of your computer. Removing the digital pen from the digital pen pocket prompts Windows to initiate a swift pairing of the pen and show a notification on your display. Using the digital pen on the display when the pen has not been stored in the pen pocket and has previously powered down prompts Windows to initiate a swift pairing of the pen and show a notification on your display. Connecting to a wired network Your computer requires a dock or a USB adapter (sold separately) to connect to wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connections. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. NOTE: Although you can connect your computer to a wired network through a docking station or external adapter, your computer does not support S4/S5 WOL (Wake on LAN) or UEFI PXE boot via LAN functionality. Connecting to a wired network 19 4 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the touchpad. Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen. Depending on your computer model, you can navigate the computer screen using one or more methods. Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately). Use an on-screen keyboard. Use a pointing stick. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures The touchpad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right touchpad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate the touch screen, touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. To customize gestures and see videos of how they work, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. Some products include a precision touchpad, which provides enhanced gesture functionality. To determine if you have a precision touchpad and find additional information, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on both the touchpad and a touch screen. Tap Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the touchpad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the touchpad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. 20 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen Two-finger slide (touchpad and precision touchpad) Place two fingers slightly apart on the touchpad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Two-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) Tap two fingers on the touchpad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with a mouse. Three-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the three-finger tap opens the taskbar search box. Tap three fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Using touchpad and touch screen gestures 21 Four-finger tap (touchpad and precision touchpad) By default, the four-finger tap opens the Action Center. Tap four fingers on the touchpad zone to perform the gesture. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Taps box, select a gesture setting. Three-finger swipe (touchpad and precision touchpad) Swipe three fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the three-finger swipe switches between open apps and the desktop. Swipe three fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe three fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture on a precision touchpad, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Three-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. Four-finger swipe (precision touchpad) Swipe four fingers away from you to see all open windows. By default, the four-finger swipe switches between open desktops. Swipe four fingers left or right to switch between desktops. Swipe four fingers toward you to show the desktop. To change the function of this gesture, select Start, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Touchpad. Under Four-finger gestures, in the Swipes box, select a gesture setting. 22 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard These instructions help you learn to use the on-screen keyboard. 1. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. 2. NOTE: Suggested words might be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 23 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera Your computer has one camera that enables you to connect with others for work or play. Your camera allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. To determine which camera is on your product, see Components on page 3. To use your camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Some cameras also feature HD (high-definition) capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Security on page 31 for details about using Windows Hello. You can enhance your computer privacy by covering the lens with the camera privacy cover. By default, the camera lens is uncovered, but you can slide the camera privacy cover to block the camera's view. To use the camera, slide the camera privacy cover in the opposite direction to reveal the lens. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on an attached external optical drive. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. Viewing or changing sound settings Use these instructions to view or change sound settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using the control panel to view and control audio settings You can view or change sound settings using the audio control panel. Your computer might include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer might include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. 24 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. NOTE: Your computer supports a maximum of two external displays. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays Follow these steps to discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps. NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow these steps. Type project in the taskbar search box, and then select Project to a second screen. Select Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port To connect devices to a USB Type-C port, follow these steps. NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. Using video 25 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. 26 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Using Sleep Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. Your computer does not support the use of the Hibernation state. SleepThe Sleep state automatically initiates after a period of inactivity. Your work is available in memory, allowing you to resume your work quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. Depending on your computer model, the Sleep state might also support Modern Standby mode. This mode keeps some internal operations awake and enables your computer to receive web notifications, such as emails, while in Sleep. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 27. IMPORTANT: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always turn off your computer instead of using the Sleep state anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. IMPORTANT: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in several ways. Briefly press the power button. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap the touchpad. When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. IMPORTANT:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. IMPORTANT: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. 1. 2. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 4 seconds. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When the computer has a charged battery and is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Using HP Fast Charge The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time might vary by 10%. When the remaining battery charge is between 0 and 50%, the battery charges to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon. Conserving battery power Lower the brightness of the display. Follow these steps to conserve battery power and maximize battery life. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the computer warns you in one of several ways. The battery light indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 28. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If the computer is in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. Resolving a low battery level You can quickly resolve low battery level conditions. Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power. Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product AC adapter Running on battery power 29 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the battery level is low and you cannot bring the computer out of Hibernation, connect the AC adapter. 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Factory-sealed battery The battery in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Running on external power For information about connecting to external power, see the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking device or expansion product. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or updating system software Connect the computer to external power under any of the following conditions:

When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When updating the system BIOS When you connect the computer to external power:

The battery begins to charge. The Power icon changes appearance. When you disconnect external power:

The computer switches to battery power. The Power icon changes appearance. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Security Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, Computer Setup

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. NOTE: Some security features listed in this chapter might not be available on your computer. Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and Computer Setup (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Table 7-1 Security solutions Computer risk Security feature Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. You can set several types of passwords, depending on how you want to control access to your information. You can set passwords in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. BIOS administrator passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. 31 Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Factory-sealed battery The battery in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. Setting passwords in Windows Windows passwords can help protect your computer from unauthorized access. Table 7-2 Types of Windows passwords and their functions Password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. User password Protects access to a Windows user account. Setting passwords in Computer Setup Computer Setup passwords provide additional layers of security for your computer. Table 7-3 Types of Computer Setup passwords and their functions Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled.

*For details, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps. Setting a new BIOS administrator password A BIOS administrator password helps prevent unauthorized access to Computer Setup. Use these instructions to set a new BIOS administrator password. 1. Computers with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Start Computer Setup. Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password, and then press enter. 32 Chapter 7 Security 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to change a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password Use these instructions to delete a BIOS administrator password. 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password, and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. Using passwords 33 NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same keys that you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. Windows Hello Windows Hello allows you to enroll your facial ID and set up a PIN. After enrollment, you can use your facial ID or PIN to sign in to Windows. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Password, and then select Add. Under Windows Hello Face, select Set up. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enroll your facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length. The default setting is for numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols check box. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access email, a network, or the internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage that they cause. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. HP strongly recommends that you continue to use an antivirus program to fully protect your computer. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program that you install on your computer, network, or both, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 34 Chapter 7 Security Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. To view or change the settings:

IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. 1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing software updates 35 8 Maintenance Performing regular maintenance keeps your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. To run Disk Defragmenter:

NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. 1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and Optimize Drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers regularly. Updates can resolve issues and provide new features and options. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you do not get the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. Cleaning your computer Cleaning your computer regularly removes dirt and debris so that your device continues to operate at its best. Use the following information to safely clean the external surfaces of your computer. 36 Chapter 8 Maintenance Removing dirt and debris from your computer Here are the recommended steps to clean dirt and debris from your computer. 1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the surfaces. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. 2. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with diluted mild detergent or household cleaner. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. 6. 7. See Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant on page 37 for recommended steps to clean the high-touch, external surfaces on your computer to help prevent the spread of harmful bacteria and viruses. Cleaning your computer with a disinfectant The World Health Organization (WHO) recommends cleaning surfaces, followed by disinfection, as a best practice for preventing the spread of viral respiratory illnesses and harmful bacteria. After cleaning the external surfaces of your computer using the steps in Removing dirt and debris from your computer on page 37, you might also choose to clean the surfaces with a disinfectant. A disinfectant that is within HPs cleaning guidelines is an alcohol solution consisting of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. This solution is also known as rubbing alcohol and is sold in most stores. Follow these steps when disinfecting high-touch, external surfaces on your computer:

1. Wear disposable gloves made of latex (or nitrile gloves, if you are latex-sensitive) when cleaning the 2. surfaces. Turn off your device and unplug the power cord and other connected external devices. Remove any installed batteries from items such as wireless keyboards. CAUTION: To prevent electric shock or damage to components, never clean a product while it is turned on or plugged in. 3. Moisten a microfiber cloth with a mixture of 70% isopropyl alcohol and 30% water. The cloth should be moist, but not dripping wet. Cleaning your computer 37 CAUTION: Do not use any of the following chemicals or any solutions that contain them, including spray-based surface cleaners: bleach, peroxides (including hydrogen peroxide), acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, methylene chloride, or any petroleum-based materials, such as gasoline, paint thinner, benzene, or toluene. IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the surface, avoid abrasive cloths, towels, and paper towels. 4. Wipe the exterior of the product gently with the moistened cloth. IMPORTANT: Keep liquids away from the product. Avoid getting moisture in any openings. If liquid makes its way inside your HP product, it can cause damage to the product. Do not spray liquids directly on the product. Do not use aerosol sprays, solvents, abrasives, or cleaners containing hydrogen peroxide or bleach that might damage the finish. 5. 6. 7. Start with the display (if applicable). Wipe carefully in one direction, and move from the top of the display to the bottom. Finish with any flexible cables, like power cord, keyboard cable, and USB cables. Be sure that surfaces have completely air-dried before turning the device on after cleaning. Discard the gloves after each cleaning. Clean your hands immediately after you remove the gloves. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you must travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Back up your information to an external drive. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Shut down the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Take a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. IMPORTANT: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you can use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices might be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions might apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. 38 Chapter 8 Maintenance WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to run the computer with a voltage converter kit that is sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 39 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools to back up your information, create a restore point, reset your computer, create recovery media, or restore your computer to its factory state. Performing these standard procedures can return your computer to a working state faster. Backing up information and creating recovery media You can use Windows tools for backing up your information. Using Windows tools for backing up HP recommends that you back up your information immediately after initial setup. You can do this task either using Windows Backup locally with an external USB drive or using online tools. IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Restoring and recovering your system You have several tools available to recover your system both within and outside of Windows if the desktop cannot load. HP recommends that you attempt to restore your system using the Restoring and recovery methods on page 40. Creating a system restore System Restore is available in Windows. The System Restore software can automatically or manually create restore points, or snapshots, of the system files and settings on the computer at a particular point. When you use System Restore, it returns your computer to its state at the time you made the restore point. Your personal files and documents should not be affected. Restoring and recovery methods After you run the first method, test to see whether the issue still exists before you proceed to the next method, which might now be unnecessary. 1. 2. For more information about the first two methods, see the Get Help app:

Select the Start button, select the Get Help app, and then enter the task you want to perform. Run a Microsoft System Restore. Run Reset this PC. NOTE: You must be connected to the internet to access the Get Help app. 40 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS) HP provides several tools to help set up and protect your computer. Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as hard drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. To start Computer Setup, turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup You can navigate and select in Computer Setup using one or more methods. To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS will be available on through Windows Update. If Windows Update is enabled to automatically download and install BIOS updates on your computer, the BIOS will update the next time you restart your computer. Using Computer Setup 41 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 42. If your PC does not start in Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. Using an HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows hardware failure ID code When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. Depending on the instructions on the screen, choose one of these options:

If failure ID link is displayed, select the link and follow the on-screen instructions. If instructions for calling support are displayed. Follow those instructions. Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 43. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in some situations. 42 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstallation image. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive, follow this procedure. 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. Select Download HP Diagnostics UEFI, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number You can download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number to a USB flash drive. NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, you might have to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the 1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive 43 12 Specifications When you travel with or store your computer, the input power ratings and operating specifications provide helpful information. Input power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100 V240 V, 50 Hz60 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within one or more of the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Table 12-1 DC power specifications Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Use the operating specifications for helpful information when you travel with or store your computer. Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications Factor Temperature Metric U.S. Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) 5C to 35C 20C to 60C 41F to 95F 4F to 140F 44 Chapter 12 Specifications Table 12-2 Operating environment specifications (continued) Factor Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating Metric 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

U.S. 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

15 m to 3,048 m 15 m to 12,192 m 50 ft to 10,000 ft 50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 45 13 Electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 46 Chapter 13 Electrostatic discharge 14 Accessibility HP's goal is to design, produce, and market products, services, and information that everyone everywhere can use, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate third-party assistive technology (AT) devices or applications. HP and accessibility Because HP works to weave diversity, inclusion, and work/life into the fabric of the company, it is reflected in everything HP does. HP strives to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 48. The HP commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports the company's diversity objectives and helps ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. The HP accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve that goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide HP actions. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within HP, and provide employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features, and make information about HP products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that improves assistive technology relevant to HP products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. HP and accessibility 47 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. As a founding member, HP joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports HPs accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that people with disabilities can effectively use. IAAP will make the profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You can choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, can also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) These links provide information about accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and products most appropriate for your situation. HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options 48 Chapter 14 Accessibility If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 51. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Countries worldwide are enacting regulations to improve access to products and services for persons with disabilities. These regulations are historically applicable to telecommunications products and services, PCs and printers with certain communications and video playback features, their associated user documentation, and their customer support. Standards The US Access Board created Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-

based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multimedia, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The European Union created the EN 301 549 standard within Mandate 376 as an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Standards and legislation 49 Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations United States Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. These links provide information about key legislation, regulations, and standards. Australia Canada Europe Worldwide Useful accessibility resources and links These organizations, institutions, and resources might be good sources of information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) These organizations are a few of the many that provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Lighthouse International Educational institutions Many educational institutions, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-

related limitations. 50 Chapter 14 Accessibility California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ILO Global Business and Disability network ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Many resources, including these examples, provide information about disabilities and age-related limitations. Job Accommodation Network European Disability Forum EnableMart Microsoft Enable HP links These HP-specific links provide information that relates to disabilities and age-related limitations. Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales Contacting support HP offers technical support and assistance with accessibility options for customers with disabilities. NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Contacting support 51 Index A accessibility 47 accessibility needs assessment 48 action keys 11 identifying 11 keyboard backlight 12 mute 12 next 12 pause 12 play 12 privacy screen 11 screen brightness 12 speaker volume 12 using 11 wireless 12 Action keys, identifying 11 administrator password 32 airplane mode key 16 antivirus software 34 assistive technology (AT) finding 48 purpose 47 AT (assistive technology) finding 48 purpose 47 audio 24 adjusting volume 12 sound settings 24 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack, identifying 4 B backup, creating 40 backups 40 battery conserving power 29 discharging 29 factory-sealed 30, 32 low battery levels 29 resolving low battery level 29, 30 battery charge 29 battery light 3, 4 battery power 28 52 Index BIOS updating 41 Bluetooth device 16, 18 Bluetooth label 13 bottom 13 buttons digital pen 10 digital pen, pairing 10 left touchpad 7 power 9 right touchpad 7 C camera 5 identifying 5 using 24 camera light, identifying 5 camera privacy cover using 24 camera privacy cover, identifying 5 caps lock light, identifying 8 caring for your computer 36 cleaning your computer 36 disinfecting 37 removing dirt and debris 37 components display 5 keyboard area 6 left side 4 right side 3 Computer Setup BIOS administrator password 32, 33, 34 navigating and selecting 41 starting 41 connecting to a WLAN 17 corporate WLAN connection 17 critical battery level 29 customer support, accessibility 51 D data transfer 25 digital pen pairing button 10 digital pen buttons, identifying 10 digital pen light, identifying 10 digital pen pairing button, identifying 10 Disk Cleanup software 36 Disk Defragmenter software 36 display components 5 E electrostatic discharge 46 esc key, identifying 11 eSIM 18 external power, using 30 F factory-sealed battery 30, 32 firewall software 34 fn key, identifying 11 fn lock light, identifying 8 four-finger swipe touchpad gesture 22 four-finger tap touchpad gesture 22 G gesture 22 GPS 18 H hardware, locating 3 high-definition devices, connecting 25 hot keys break 13 pause 13 programming query 13 using 13 HP Assistive Policy 47 HP Fast Charge 29 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI downloading 42 starting 42 using 42 HP resources 1 I initiating Sleep 27 input power 44 internal microphones, identifying 5 International Association of Accessibility Professionals 48 mute volume action key 12 N next track action key 12 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo 4 K keyboard and optional mouse using 23 keyboard backlight action key 12 keys action 11 esc 11 fn 11 Windows 11 keys, action 11 L labels Bluetooth 13 regulatory 13 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 13 WLAN 13 left side components 4 lights AC adapter and battery 3, 4 battery 3, 4 camera 5 caps lock 8 digital pen 10 fn lock 8 power 8 privacy key 8 low battery level 29 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 updating programs and drivers 36 managing power 27 Miracast 25 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 23 operating environment 44 P passwords administrator 32 BIOS administrator 32, 33, 34 user 32 pause action key 12 pen pocket, identifying 10 play action key 12 ports USB Type-C 3, 4, 25 power battery 28 external 30 power button, identifying 9 power icon, using 28 power lights 8 power settings, using 28 precision touchpad using 20 precision touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 22 four-finger tap 22 three-finger swipe 22 three-finger tap 21 two-finger slide 21 two-finger tap 21 privacy key light 8 privacy screen action key, identifying 11 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 17 R recovery 40 recovery media 40 creating using Windows tools 40 regulatory information regulatory label 13 wireless certification labels 13 resources, accessibility 50 restoring 40 right side components 3 S screen brightness action keys 12 Section 508 accessibility standards 49 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 setup utility navigating and selecting 41 shipping the computer 38 shutdown 28 SIM card tray, identifying 9 SIM card, correct size 15 SIM card, inserting 14, 15 Sleep exiting 27 initiating 27 Sleep, initiating 27 software antivirus 34 Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 firewall 34 software installed, locating 3 software updates, installing 35 sound. See audio sound settings, using 24 speaker volume action keys 12 speaker, identifying 4 speakers, identifying 9 special keys, using 10 standards and legislation, accessibility 49 system restore 40 system restore point, creating 40 T tap touchpad and touch screen gesture 20 three-finger swipe touchpad gesture 22 three-finger tap touchpad gesture 21 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 23 touchpad settings 6 using 20 Index 53 touchpad and touch screen gestures tap 20 two-finger pinch zoom 20 wireless button 16 wireless certification label 13 wireless controls button 16 operating system 16 wireless key 16 wireless light 16 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 17 corporate WLAN connection 17 functional range 17 public WLAN connection 17 WLAN antennas, identifying 5 WLAN device 13 WLAN label 13 WWAN antennas, identifying 5 WWAN device 16, 17 touchpad buttons identifying 7 touchpad gestures four-finger swipe 22 four-finger tap 22 three-finger swipe 22 three-finger tap 21 two-finger slide 21 two-finger tap 21 touchpad zone, identifying 7 transfer data 25 traveling with the computer 13, 38 turning off the computer 28 two-finger pinch zoom touchpad and touch screen gesture 20 two-finger slide touchpad gesture 21 two-finger tap touchpad gesture 21 U unresponsive system 28 updating programs and drivers 36 USB Type-C port, connecting 25 USB Type-C port, identifying 3, 4 user password 32 using passwords 31 using the keyboard and optional mouse 23 using the touchpad 20 V video 25 wireless displays 25 volume adjusting 12 mute 12 W Windows backup 40 recovery media 40 system restore point 40 Windows Hello using 34 Windows key, identifying 11 Windows tools, using 40 wireless action key 12 wireless antennas, identifying 5 54 Index

User Guide Product notice Software terms This user guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2018 HP Development Company, L.P. AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: August 2018 Document Part Number: L11079-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select computer products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Welcome ....................................................................................................................................................... 1 Finding information ............................................................................................................................................... 2 2 Components .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Labels ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4 3 Network connections ..................................................................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a wireless network ......................................................................................................................... 6 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................................. 6 Wireless button ................................................................................................................. 6 Operating system controls ............................................................................................... 6 Connecting to a WLAN ......................................................................................................................... 7 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ............................................................................ 7 Using GPS (select products only) ........................................................................................................ 8 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................... 8 Connecting Bluetooth devices .......................................................................................... 8 Using NFC to share information (select products only) ...................................................................... 8 Sharing .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a wired network .............................................................................................................................. 9 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) ....................................................... 9 Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) ................................................................ 10 Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection ............................................. 10 Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) ............. 11 Customizing MAC Address Pass Through .......................................................................................... 11 4 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 12 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 12 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 12 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) ..................................................................................................... 13 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ........................................................................................................ 13 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 13 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................. 14 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................. 15 vii Using an optional keyboard or mouse ................................................................................................................. 15 Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) .......................................................................................... 15 5 Entertainment features ............................................................................................................................... 16 Using a camera (select products only) ................................................................................................................ 16 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 16 Connecting a microphone ................................................................................................................. 16 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 17 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 17 Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ......................... 17 Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) ....................... 18 Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) ........................................... 19 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) ............................................ 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 21 Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device ................................................................................. 21 Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport ...................................... 22 Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) ... 22 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) ................... 23 Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) ...................... 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 24 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ................ 24 Using data transfer .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) ..................................................... 24 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 26 Using Sleep and Hibernation ............................................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Sleep ............................................................................................................... 26 Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................................. 27 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 27 Using the Power icon and Power Options ............................................................................................................ 28 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 28 Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) .................................................................................... 28 Displaying battery charge ................................................................................................................. 29 Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) .................................. 29 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 29 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 29 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 30 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 30 viii Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 30 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 30 7 Security ...................................................................................................................................................... 31 Protecting the computer ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 31 Setting passwords in Windows ......................................................................................................... 32 Setting passwords in Computer Setup ............................................................................................. 33 Managing a BIOS administrator password ........................................................................................ 33 Entering a BIOS administrator password ....................................................................... 34 Using DriveLock Security Options ..................................................................................................... 35 Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) ................................................... 35 Enabling Automatic DriveLock ..................................................................... 35 Disabling Automatic DriveLock .................................................................... 35 Entering an Automatic DriveLock password ................................................ 36 Selecting manual DriveLock ........................................................................................... 36 Setting a DriveLock master password ......................................................... 37 Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password ......................................... 37 Disabling DriveLock ........................................................................................................ 38 Entering a DriveLock password ...................................................................................... 38 Changing a DriveLock password ..................................................................................... 38 Windows Hello (select products only) ................................................................................................................. 39 Using antivirus software ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Using firewall software ........................................................................................................................................ 39 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Client Security (select products only) .................................................................................................. 40 Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) .......................................................................... 40 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 40 Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) ............................................................................................... 41 Locating the fingerprint reader ......................................................................................................... 41 8 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 42 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 42 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 42 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 42 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 43 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 43 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 43 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 44 ix Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 44 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 44 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 44 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ........................................................................................................... 46 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 46 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ........................................................................................... 46 Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media .................................................................... 47 Before you begin ............................................................................................................. 47 Creating the recovery media ........................................................................................... 47 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media .......................................... 48 Restoring and recovery ........................................................................................................................................ 48 Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools .............................................................. 48 Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition ........................................... 48 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................... 48 Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................ 49 Recovering using HP Recovery media ............................................................................................... 49 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................................... 50 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ............................................................ 50 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start ............................................................................................ 51 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 51 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 51 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 51 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 51 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 52 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 52 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 52 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 53 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 54 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 55 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) ................................................................. 55 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ....................................................................... 55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version ....................... 56 Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 56 Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows ............................................................................. 56 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ............................................................................................................. 56 x Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ....................................................................................... 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive .............................................. 57 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version .............................. 57 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number

(select products only) ..................................................................................................... 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) ............................................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI ................................................................. 58 Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version ................. 58 Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number ............................................................................................................................ 58 Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings .................................................... 58 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 62 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 63 Accessibility ......................................................................................................................................................... 63 Finding the technology tools you need ............................................................................................ 63 Our commitment ............................................................................................................................... 63 International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) ....................................................... 63 Finding the best assistive technology .............................................................................................. 64 Assessing your needs ..................................................................................................... 64 Accessibility for HP products .......................................................................................... 64 Standards and legislation .................................................................................................................................... 65 Standards .......................................................................................................................................... 65 Mandate 376 EN 301 549 ............................................................................................ 65 Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) ................................................................ 65 Legislation and regulations .............................................................................................................. 65 United States ................................................................................................................... 66 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) ............................... 66 Canada ............................................................................................................................. 66 Europe ............................................................................................................................. 67 United Kingdom .............................................................................................................. 67 Australia .......................................................................................................................... 67 Worldwide ....................................................................................................................... 67 Useful accessibility resources and links .............................................................................................................. 68 Organizations .................................................................................................................................... 68 Educational institutions .................................................................................................................... 68 xi Other disability resources ................................................................................................................. 68 HP links .............................................................................................................................................. 68 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 69 xii 1 Welcome After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

TIP: To quickly return to the computer Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop, press the Windows key previous screen. on your keyboard. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the Connect to the InternetSet up your wired or wireless network so that you can connect to the Internet. For more information, see Network connections on page 6. Update your antivirus softwareProtect your computer from damage caused by viruses. The software is preinstalled on the computer. For more information, see Using antivirus software on page 39. Get to know your computerLearn about your computer features. See Components on page 3 and Navigating the screen on page 12 for additional information. Find installed softwareAccess a list of the software preinstalled on the computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 46. 1 Finding information To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers Replacement parts videos (select products only) Maintenance and service guides HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Welcome 2 Components Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Select the Start button. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Apps and Features. Locating hardware 3 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Labels may be in paper form or imprinted on the product. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, on the back of the display, or on the bottom of a tablet kickstand. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you may be asked for the serial number, the product number, or the model number. Locate this information before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) HP product name Model number Product ID Serial number Warranty period Component

(1)

(2) HP product name Product ID 4 Chapter 2 Components Component

(3)

(4) Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 5 3 Network connections Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select products only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations

(similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Wireless button (also called airplane mode key or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as wireless button) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer may have a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 2. or 6 Chapter 3 Network connections On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 2. On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

NOTE:

1. 2. 3. If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to:

On the taskbar, right-click the network status icon, and then select Open Network & Internet settings. or On the taskbar, select the network status icon, and then select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet Status section, select Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 3. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or 1. 2. 3. On the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select Network & Internet settings. Under the Network & Internet section, select Cellular, and then select Advanced Options. Connecting to a wireless network 7 Some mobile network operators require the use of a SIM card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. 2. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Audio devices (headset, speakers) Imaging devices (printer, camera) External keyboard Mouse Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth and other devices settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select Add Bluetooth or other device, and then in the Add a device dialog box, select Bluetooth. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Using NFC to share information (select products only) Your computer supports Near Field Communication (NFC), which allows you to wirelessly share information between two NFC-enabled devices. Information is transferred by tapping the tapping area (antenna) of the 8 Chapter 3 Network connections computer with the antenna of your phone or other device. With NFC and supported apps, you can share websites, transfer contact information, transfer payments, and print on NFC-enabled printers. NOTE: To locate the tapping area on your computer, see Components on page 3. Sharing 1. 2. 3. Confirm that the NFC function is enabled. a. Type wireless in the taskbar search box, and then select Turn wireless devices on or off. Confirm that the selection for NFC is On. b. Tap the NFC tapping area with an NFC-enabled device. You may hear a sound when the devices connect. NOTE: To find the location of the antenna on the other NFC device, refer to your device instructions. Follow any on-screen instructions to continue. Connecting to a wired network Select products may allow wired connections: local area network (LAN) and modem connection. A LAN connection uses a network cable and is much faster than a modem, which uses a telephone cable. Both cables are sold separately. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into an RJ-45 (network) jack. Connecting to a local area network (LAN) (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. NOTE: A feature called HP LAN-Wireless Protection may be enabled on your computer. It closes your wireless (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection when you connect directly to a LAN. For more information about HP LAN-

Wireless Protection, see Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) on page 10. If there is no RJ-45 port on the computer, connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 network cable or an optional docking device or expansion product. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer or on an optional docking device or expansion product. Connecting to a wired network 9 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Using HP LAN-Wireless Protection (select products only) In a LAN environment, you can set HP LAN-Wireless Protection to safeguard your LAN network from unauthorized wireless access. When HP LAN-Wireless Protection is enabled, the WLAN (Wi-Fi) or WWAN connection is turned off when the computer is connected directly to a LAN. Turning on and customizing HP LAN-Wireless Protection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Connect a network cable to the network jack on the computer, or on an optional docking device or expansion product. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Built-in Device Options. Select the check box for LAN/WLAN Auto Switching and/or LAN/WWAN Auto Switching to turn off WLAN and/or WWAN connections when connected to a LAN network. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. 10 Chapter 3 Network connections Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) MAC Address Pass Through provides a customizable way of identifying your computer and its communications on networks. This system MAC address provides unique identification even when your computer is connected through an Ethernet adapter. This address is enabled by default. Customizing MAC Address Pass Through 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start Computer Setup (BIOS). Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed. Tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select MAC Address Pass Through. In the box to the right of Host Based MAC Address, select either System Address to enable MAC address Pass Through or Custom Address to customize the address. If you selected Custom, select MAC ADDRESS, enter your customized system MAC address, and then press enter to save the address. If the computer has an embedded LAN and you would like to use the embedded MAC address as the system MAC address, select Reuse Embedded LAN Address. or Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Using HP MAC Address Pass Through to identify your computer on a network (select products only) 11 4 Navigating the screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen You can navigate the computer screen in one or more of the following ways:

Use an optional mouse or keyboard (purchased separately) Use an on-screen keyboard Use a pointing stick Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen (select products only). Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 12 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger slide to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the four-finger tap to open the action center. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 13 Tap four fingers on the Touchpad to open the action center and view current settings and notifications. Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Use the three-finger swipe to view open windows and to switch between open windows and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. 14 Chapter 4 Navigating the screen One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using an optional keyboard or mouse An optional keyboard or mouse allows you to type, select items, scroll, and perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. Using an on-screen keyboard (select products only) 1. 2. To display an on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. NOTE: Action keys and hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. Using an optional keyboard or mouse 15 5 Entertainment features Use your HP computer for business or pleasure to meet with others via the camera, mix audio and video, or connect external devices like a projector, monitor, TV, or speakers. See Components on page 3 to locate the audio, video and camera features on your computer. Using a camera (select products only) Your computer has a camera (integrated camera) that records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To access the camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio You can download and listen to music, stream audio content (including radio) from the web, record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. You can also play music CDs on the computer (on select models) or attach an external optical drive to play CDs. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach headphones or speakers. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 21. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. 16 Chapter 5 Entertainment features Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting a DisplayPort device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C DisplayPort device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external DisplayPort device, connect the DisplayPort device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB SuperSpeed and DisplayPort port on the computer. Using video 17 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external DisplayPort device. Press f1 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f1 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting a Thunderbolt device using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C Thunderbolt device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see video or high-resolution display output on an external Thunderbolt device, connect the Thunderbolt device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C Thunderbolt port on the computer. 18 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external Thunderbolt device. Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a VGA video device to your computer, you need an VGA cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. Using video 19 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 20 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. Connecting a Thunderbolt DisplayPort device The Thunderbolt DisplayPort connects an optional high-resolution display device or a high-performance data device. This port delivers higher performance than the VGA external monitor port and improves digital connectivity. Using video 21 Install all the latest drivers for your Thunderbolt device before connecting the device to the NOTE:

Thunderbolt DisplayPort. Thunderbolt cable and Thunderbolt device (sold separately) must be compatible with Windows. To determine whether your device is Thunderbolt Certified for Windows, go to https://thunderbolttechnology.net/products. 1. Connect one end of the Thunderbolt DisplayPort cable to the Thunderbolt DisplayPort on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the digital display device. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Discovering and connecting wired displays using MultiStream Transport MultiStream Transport (MST) allows you to connect multiple wired display devices to your computer by connecting to the VGA or DisplayPorts on your computer and also to the VGA or DisplayPorts on a hub or an external docking station. You can connect in several ways, depending on the type of graphics controller installed on your computer and whether or not your computer includes a built-in hub. Go to Device Manager to find out what hardware is installed on your computer. Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. Connect displays to computers with AMD or Nvidia graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an AMD graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 6 external display devices. NOTE: With an Nvidia graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 4 external display devices. 22 Chapter 5 Entertainment features To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. To see all of your connected display devices, type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. If you don't see all of your connected displays, be sure that each is connected to the correct port on the hub. NOTE: Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which spans your computer screen across all enabled display devices. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with an optional hub) NOTE: With an Intel graphics controller and optional hub, you can connect up to 3 display devices. To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. Connect an external hub (purchased separately) to the DisplayPort on your computer, using a DP-to-DP cable (purchased separately). Be sure that the hub power adapter is connected to AC power. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts on the hub. 2. 3. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Connect displays to computers with Intel graphics (with a built-in hub) With your internal hub and Intel graphics controller, you can connect up to 3 display devices in the following configurations:

Two 1920 x 1200 DP monitors connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station One 2560 x 1600 DP monitor connected to the computer + one 1920 x 1200 VGA monitor connected to an optional docking station To set up multiple display devices, follow these steps:

1. Connect your external display devices to the VGA ports or DisplayPorts (DP) on the computer base or the docking station. 2. When Windows detects a monitor connected to the DP hub, the DisplayPort Topology Notification dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate options to configure your displays. Multiple display choices include Duplicate, which mirrors your computer screen on all enabled display devices, or Extend, which extends the screen image across all enabled display devices. NOTE:

If this dialog box does not appear, be sure that each external display device is connected to the correct port on the hub. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select System. Under Display, select the appropriate resolution, and then select Keep changes. Using video 23 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:

Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. Using data transfer Your computer is a powerful entertainment device that enables you to transfer photos, videos, and movies from your USB devices to view on your computer. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the USB Type-C ports on the computer to connect a USB device, such as a cell phone, camera, activity tracker, or smartwatch, and transfer the files to your computer. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your USB Type-C features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Connecting devices to a USB Type-C port (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. 1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 24 Chapter 5 Entertainment features 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Using data transfer 25 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power and an external power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Some power management features described in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Sleep on page 26. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level or the computer has been in the Sleep state for an extended period of time. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) on page 27. Initiating and exiting Sleep Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. Close the display (select products only). You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button (select products only). Press the Sleep hot key (select products only); for example, fn+f1 or fn+f12. Briefly press the power button. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Tap the TouchPad (select products only). Press a key on the keyboard (select products only). If the computer is closed, raise the display (select products only). When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password 26 Chapter 6 Managing power Initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Right-click the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power buttons do (wording may vary by product). Depending on your product, you can enable Hibernation for battery power or external power in any of the following ways:

Power buttonUnder Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the power button, and then select Hibernate. Sleep button (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I press the sleep button, and then select Hibernate. Lid (select products only)Under Power and sleep buttons and lid settings (wording may vary by product), select When I close the lid, and then select Hibernate. Power menuSelect Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate check box. The Power menu can be accessed by selecting the Start button. Select Save changes. 4. To initiate Hibernation, use the method that you enabled in step 3. To exit Hibernation, briefly press the power button. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and the computer. Shut down the computer when it will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period. The recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 27 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. If your computer has a user-replaceable battery (select products only), disconnect the computer from external power, and then remove the battery. Using the Power icon and Power Options The Power icon is located on the Windows taskbar. The Power icon allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the Power icon

, and then select Power Options. Different Power icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. NOTE: When you disconnect external power, the display brightness is automatically decreased to conserve battery charge. Select computer products can switch between graphic controllers to conserve battery charge. Using HP Fast Charge (select products only) The HP Fast Charge feature allows you to quickly charge your computer battery. Charging time may vary by

+/- 10%. Depending on your computer model and the HP AC adapter provided with your computer, HP Fast Charge operates in one or more of the following ways:

When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 50%, the battery will charge to 50% of full capacity in no more than 30 to 45 minutes, depending on your computer model. When the remaining battery charge is between zero and 90%, the battery will charge to 90% of full capacity in no more than 90 minutes. To use HP Fast Charge, shut down your computer, and then connect the AC adapter to your computer and to external power. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Displaying battery charge To view the percentage of remaining battery charge, place the mouse pointer over the Power icon

. Finding battery information in HP Support Assistant (select products only) To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes, and then in the Diagnostics section, select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity HP Battery Check Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The Power icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

on page 28. For additional information about the Power icon, see Using the Power icon and Power Options Running on battery power 29 The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Optional docking device or expansion product AC adapter Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Security Protecting the computer Standard security features provided by the Windows operating system and the Windows Computer Setup utility (BIOS, which runs under any operating system) can protect your personal settings and data from a variety of risks. NOTE: Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. NOTE: Before you send your computer for service, back up and delete confidential files, and remove all password settings. NOTE: Some features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. NOTE: Your computer supports Computrace, which is an online security-based tracking and recovery service available in select regions. If the computer is stolen, Computrace can track the computer if the unauthorized user accesses the Internet. You must purchase the software and subscribe to the service in order to use Computrace. For information about ordering the Computrace software, go to http://www.hp.com. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Security feature HP Client Security software, in combination with a password, smart card, contactless card, registered fingerprints, or other authentication credential BIOS power-on password Unauthorized access to Computer Setup (BIOS) BIOS administrator password in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock password (select products only) in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized startup from an optional external optical drive

(select products only), optional external hard drive (select products only), or internal network adapter Boot options feature in Computer Setup*

Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Windows user password Unauthorized access to data Windows BitLocker Unauthorized removal of the computer Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable on select products only)

*Computer Setup is an embedded, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. You can use a pointing device (TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make selections in Computer Setup. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use the touch screen. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information. Several types of passwords can be set, depending on how you want to control access to your information. Passwords can be set in Windows or in Computer Setup, which is preinstalled on the computer. Protecting the computer 31 BIOS administrator, power-on, and DriveLock passwords are set in Computer Setup and are managed by the system BIOS. Windows passwords are set only in the Windows operating system. If you forget both the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password set in Computer Setup, the hard drive that is protected by the passwords is permanently locked and can no longer be used. You can use the same password for a Computer Setup feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Do not use the same password for multiple applications or websites, and do not reuse your Windows password for any other application or website. Use the Password Manager feature of HP Client Security to store your user names and passwords for your websites and applications. You can securely read them in the future if they cannot be remembered. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. The following tables list commonly used Windows and BIOS administrator passwords and describe their functions. Setting passwords in Windows Password Administrator password*

Function Protects access to a Windows administrator-level account. NOTE: Setting the Windows administrator password does not set the BIOS administrator password. User password*

*For information about setting a Windows administrator password or a Windows user password, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Protects access to a Windows user account. 32 Chapter 7 Security Setting passwords in Computer Setup Password Function BIOS administrator password*

Protects access to Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock master password*

DriveLock user password*

NOTE:

If features have been enabled to prevent removing the BIOS administrator password, you may not be able to remove it until those features have been disabled. Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process. This password is also used to remove DriveLock protection. Protects access to the internal hard drive that is protected by DriveLock, and is set under DriveLock Passwords during the enable process.

*For details about each of these passwords, see the following topics. Managing a BIOS administrator password To set, change, or delete this password, follow these steps:

Setting a new BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. Select Security, select Create BIOS administrator password or Set Up BIOS administrator Password

(select products only), and then press enter. 3. When prompted, type a password. 4. When prompted, type the new password again to confirm. 5. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Changing a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Using passwords 33 Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted, type your new password. 6. When prompted, type your new password again to confirm. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Deleting a BIOS administrator password 1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. Enter your current BIOS administrator password. Select Security, select Change BIOS administrator Password or Change Password (select products only), and then press enter. 4. When prompted, type your current password. 5. When prompted for the new password, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 6. When prompted to type your new password again, leave the field empty, and then press enter. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Entering a BIOS administrator password At the BIOS administrator password prompt, type your password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After two unsuccessful attempts to enter the BIOS administrator password, you must restart the computer and try again. 34 Chapter 7 Security Using DriveLock Security Options DriveLock protection prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. DriveLock can be applied only to the internal hard drive(s) of the computer. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, the appropriate password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the computer or an advanced port replicator in order for it to be unlocked. DriveLock Security Options offers the following features:

Automatic DriveLockSee Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) on page 35. Set DriveLock Master PasswordSee Selecting manual DriveLock on page 36. Enable DriveLockSee Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. Selecting Automatic DriveLock (select products only) A BIOS administrator password must be set before you can enable Automatic DriveLock. When Automatic DriveLock is enabled, a random DriveLock user password and a DriveLock master password derived from the BIOS administrator password are created. When the computer is turned on, the random user password automatically unlocks the drive. If the drive is moved to another computer, you must enter the BIOS administrator password for the original computer at the DriveLock password prompt to unlock the drive. Enabling Automatic DriveLock To enable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to select the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling Automatic DriveLock To disable Automatic DriveLock, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Using passwords 35 Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. At the BIOS administrator password prompt, enter the BIOS administrator password, and then press enter. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select an internal hard drive, and then press enter. Use the enter key, left mouse click, or touch screen to clear the Automatic DriveLock check box. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering an Automatic DriveLock password While Automatic DriveLock is enabled and the drive remains attached to the original computer, you will not be prompted to enter a DriveLock password to unlock the drive. However, if the drive is moved to another computer, or the system board is replaced on the original computer, you will be prompted to provide the DriveLock password. If this happens, at the DriveLock Password prompt, type the BIOS administrator password for the original computer (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter to unlock the drive. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Selecting manual DriveLock CAUTION: To prevent a DriveLock-protected hard drive from becoming permanently unusable, record the DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password in a safe place away from your computer. If you forget both DriveLock passwords, the hard drive will be permanently locked and can no longer be used. To manually apply DriveLock protection to an internal hard drive, a master password must be set, and DriveLock must be enabled in Computer Setup. Note the following considerations about using DriveLock protection:

After DriveLock protection is applied to a hard drive, the hard drive can be accessed only by entering either the DriveLock user password or the master password. The owner of the DriveLock user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the DriveLock master password may be either a system administrator or the day-to-day user. The DriveLock user password and the DriveLock master password can be identical. 36 Chapter 7 Security Setting a DriveLock master password To set a DriveLock master password, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select Security, make the selection for Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Set DriveLock Master Password, and then press enter. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock master password. NOTE: You can enable DriveLock and set a DriveLock user password before exiting from Computer Setup. For more information, see Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password on page 37. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Enabling DriveLock and setting a DriveLock user password To enable DriveLock, and set a DriveLock user password, follow these steps:

1. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. 2. 3. 4. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to protect, and then press enter. Select Enable DriveLock and then press enter. Using passwords 37 5. 6. 7. Carefully read the warning. Follow the on-screen instructions to set a DriveLock user password and enable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Disabling DriveLock 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start Computer Setup. Computers or tablets with keyboards:

1. 2. Tablets without keyboards:

1. 2. Turn off the computer. Press the power button, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. Select Disable DriveLock, and then press enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to disable DriveLock. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Entering a DriveLock password Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the computer (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). At the DriveLock Password prompt, type your DriveLock user or master password (using the same kind of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After three incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must shut down the computer and try again. Changing a DriveLock password To change a DriveLock password in Computer Setup, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Press the power button. At the DriveLock Password prompt, type the current DriveLock user password or master password that you are changing, press enter, and then press or tap f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Security, select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock/Automatic DriveLock, and then press enter. 4. 38 Chapter 7 Security Select the hard drive you want to manage, and then press enter. 5. 6. Make the selection for the DriveLock password that you want to change, and then follow the on-screen instructions to enter passwords. NOTE: The Change DriveLock Master Password option is visible only if the DriveLock master password was provided at the DriveLock Password prompt in step 3. 7. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. To add a password, select Add. Select Get Started, and then follow the on-screen instructions enroll your fingerprint or facial ID and set up a PIN. NOTE: The PIN is not limited in length, but it must consist of numbers only. To include alphabetic or special characters, select the include letters and symbols checkbox. Using antivirus software When you use the computer to access e-mail, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose it to computer viruses. Computer viruses can disable the operating system, programs, or utilities, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and, in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. Windows Defender is preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you continue to use an antivirus program in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, access the HP Support Assistant. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be a software program you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a solution made up of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. Windows Hello (select products only) 39 When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Your computer or networking equipment may already have a firewall installed. If not, firewall software solutions are available. NOTE: Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized e-mail attachments. To temporarily resolve the problem, disable the firewall, perform the task that you want to perform, and then reenable the firewall. To permanently resolve the problem, reconfigure the firewall. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. IMPORTANT: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Client Security (select products only) HP Client Security software is preinstalled on your computer. This software can be accessed through the HP Client Security icon at the far right of the taskbar or Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that help protect against unauthorized access to the computer, networks, and critical data. For more information, see the HP Client Security software Help. Using HP Device as a Service (HP DaaS) (select products only) HP DaaS is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP DaaS helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and helps reduce time spent solving device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. For more information, go to https://www.hptouchpointmanager.com/. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 40 Chapter 7 Security Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. In order to use the fingerprint reader, you must enroll your fingerprints in HP Client Security's Credential Manager. Refer to the HP Client Security software Help. After you enroll your fingerprints in Credential Manager, you can use HP Client Security's Password Manager to store and fill in your user names and passwords in supported websites and applications. Locating the fingerprint reader On the right side of the keyboard Near the bottom of the TouchPad The fingerprint reader is a small metallic sensor that is located in one of the following areas of your computer:

On the upper-right side of the display On the left side of the display On the back of the display Depending on your product, the reader may be oriented horizontally or vertically. Using a fingerprint reader (select products only) 41 8 Maintenance It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Disk Cleanup. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 42 Chapter 8 Maintenance Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. You drop the computer. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My notebook, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Cleaning your computer Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Solution of water and mild soap Static-free cloth wipes Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Updating programs and drivers 43 CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents or germicidal wipes that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. 44 Chapter 8 Maintenance Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 45 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes, which are standard procedure for most products:

Backing up your personal informationYou can use Windows tools to back up your personal information (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating a restore pointYou can use Windows tools to create a restore point (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Creating recovery media (select products only)You can use HP Recovery Manager or HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool (select products only) to create recovery media (see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46). Restoring and recoveryWindows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state (see Using Windows tools on page 46). Removing the Recovery PartitionTo remove the Recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space

(select products only), select the Remove Recovery Partition option of HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 50. Using Windows tools IMPORTANT: Windows is the only option that allows you to back up your personal information. Schedule regular backups to avoid information loss. You can use Windows tools to back up personal information and create system restore points and recovery media, allowing you to restore from backup, refresh the computer, and reset the computer to its original state. NOTE:

If computer storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get Help app. 1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select the Get Help app. Enter the task you want to perform. NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to access the Get Help app. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) After you have successfully set up the computer, use HP Recovery Manager to create a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. This backup is called HP Recovery media. In cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced, the HP Recovery media can be used to reinstall the original operating system. To check for the presence of the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, right-click the Start button, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. NOTE:

If your computer does not list the Recovery partition in addition to the Windows partition, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 46 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering On select products, you can use the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create HP Recovery media on a bootable USB flash drive. For more information, see Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media on page 48. Using HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media NOTE:

http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you cannot create recovery media yourself, contact support to obtain recovery discs. Go to Before you begin Before you begin, note the following:

Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required media storage capacity. To create recovery media, use one of the following options:

NOTE:

If the computer does not have a recovery partition, HP Recovery Manager displays the Windows Create a Recovery Drive feature. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a recovery image on a blank USB flash drive or hard drive. If your computer has an optical drive with DVD writer capability, be sure to use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs, which are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, as described above. If an external optical drive is used, you must connect it directly to a USB port on the computer. It cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. To create a recovery USB flash drive, use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt this process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery media. HP Recovery Manager will finish the current DVD or USB flash drive. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. Creating the recovery media To create HP Recovery media using HP Recovery Manager:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. If you need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) 47 Using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool to create recovery media To create HP Recovery media using the HP Cloud Recovery Download Tool:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Software and Drivers, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restoring and recovery Restoring and recovery can be performed using one or more of the following options: Windows tools, HP Recovery Manager, or the HP Recovery partition. IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Restoring, resetting, and refreshing using Windows tools Windows offers several options for restoring, resetting, and refreshing the computer. For details, see Using Windows tools on page 46. Restoring using HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition You can use HP Recovery Manager and the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to restore the computer to the original factory state:

Resolving problems with preinstalled applications or driversTo correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver:

1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using System RecoveryTo recover the Windows partition to original factory content, select the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 48. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Using Factory Reset (select products only)Restores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and recreating the partitions and then reinstalling the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory (select products only). To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. NOTE:

install the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. If you have replaced the hard drive in the computer, you can use the Factory Reset option to Recovering using HP Recovery Manager You can use HP Recovery Manager software to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created HP Recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data that you want to retain. See Using Windows tools on page 46. 48 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. NOTE: When you start the recovery process, only the options available for your computer are displayed. Before you begin, note the following:

HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. If the computer hard drive fails, HP Recovery media must be used. This media is created using HP Recovery Manager. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, contact support to obtain recovery media. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Recovering using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. 3. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, and then select Windows Recovery Environment. or For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f11. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:

boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. Recovering using HP Recovery media If your computer does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly, you can use HP Recovery media to recover the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. Restoring and recovery 49 If your computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer NOTE:

boot order, and then follow the on-screen instructions. See Changing the computer boot order on page 50. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order. This is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive, depending on the location of your HP Recovery media. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access the system Startup menu. For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume up button, and then select f9. or Turn on or restart the tablet, quickly hold down the volume down button, and then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition (select products only) to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP Recovery media. Before removing the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media. See Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 46. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 50 Chapter 9 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following methods:

To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus, select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. Using Computer Setup 51 NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Main, and then select System Information. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes, select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then select Yes. NOTE:

If you are using arrow keys to highlight your choice, you must then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 52. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

52 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start a. b. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE:

any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are displayed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are displayed, follow these steps:

1. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:

1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:

Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, press enter, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup

(BIOS). NOTE:

If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:

1. 2. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 51. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 53 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 10 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is a Windows-based utility that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs within the Windows operating system in order to diagnose hardware failures. If HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is not installed on your computer, first you must download and install it. To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows on page 55. After HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows is installed, follow these steps to access it from HP Help and Support or HP Support Assistant. 1. To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Help and Support:

a. b. Select the Start button, and then select HP Help and Support. Right-click HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, select More, and then select Run as administrator. or To access HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows from HP Support Assistant:

a. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select Troubleshooting and fixes. Select Diagnostics, and then select HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows. b. c. 2. When the tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test at any time, select Cancel. 3. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-

digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and then provide the Failure ID code. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows download instructions are provided in English only. You must use a Windows computer to download this tool because only .exe files are provided. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows (select products only) 55 Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows version To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Downloading HP Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, and then enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select Download, and then select a location on your computer or a USB flash drive. 3. The tool is downloaded to the selected location. Installing HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows To install HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Windows, follow these steps:

Navigate to the folder on your computer or the USB flash drive where the .exe file was downloaded, double-click the .exe file, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE:

For Windows 10 S computers, you must use a Windows computer and a USB flash drive to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. For more information, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive on page 57. HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface) allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. If your PC will not boot into Windows, you can use HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to diagnose hardware issues. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. For assistance in correcting the problem, contact support, and provide the Failure ID code. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode, and you must use the attached keyboard. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. 56 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics Starting HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB flash drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI tool to a USB flash drive, see Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version on page 57. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select a language, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the preinstall image. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to a USB flash drive can be useful in the following situations:

HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is not included in the HP Tool partition. The hard drive is damaged. NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are provided. Downloading the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download UEFI Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) NOTE:

product name or number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software to a USB flash drive by using the To download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number (select products only) to a USB flash drive:

1. 2. 3. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Enter the product name or number, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the specific UEFI Diagnostics version for your computer. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI 57 Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is a firmware (BIOS) feature that downloads HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI to your computer. It can then execute the diagnostics on your computer, and it may upload results to a preconfigured server. For more information on Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI, go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags, and then select Find out more. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI NOTE: HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI is also available as a Softpaq that can be downloaded to a server. Downloading the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version To download the latest Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI version, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI section, select Download Remote Diagnostics, and then select Run. Downloading Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number NOTE:

number. For some products, it may be necessary to download the software by using the product name or To download HP Remote PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI by product name or number, follow these steps:

1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers, select your type of product, enter the product name or number in the search box that is displayed, select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostics section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the Remote UEFI version for the product. 3. Customizing Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings Using the Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics setting in Computer Setup (BIOS), you can perform the following customizations:

Set a schedule for running diagnostics unattended. You can also start diagnostics immediately in interactive mode by selecting Execute Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics. Set the location for downloading the diagnostic tools. This feature provides access to the tools from the HP website or from a server that has been preconfigured for use. Your computer does not require the traditional local storage (such as a disk drive or USB flash drive) to run remote diagnostics. Set a location for storing the test results. You can also set the user name and password settings used for uploads. Display status information about the diagnostics run previously. To customize Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings, follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Select Advanced, and then select Settings. 58 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics 3. Make your customization selections. 4. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Select Main, and then Save Changes and Exit to save your settings. Using Remote HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI settings (select products only) 59 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input Power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A /

15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc

@ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.9 A 135 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W 19.5 V dc @ 11.8 A 230 W 19.5 V dc @ 16.92 A 330 W NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. 60 Chapter 12 Specifications Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating (writing to optical disc) Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 62 Chapter 13 Electrostatic Discharge 14 Accessibility Accessibility HP is working to weave diversity, inclusion and work/life into the fabric of our company, so it is reflected in everything we do. Here are some examples of how we are putting differences to work to create an inclusive environment focused on connecting people to the power of technology throughout the world. Finding the technology tools you need Technology can unleash your human potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. For more information, see Finding the best assistive technology on page 64. Our commitment HP is committed to providing products and services that are accessible for people with disabilities. This commitment supports our company's diversity objectives and helps us ensure that the benefits of technology are available to all. Our accessibility goal is to design, produce, and market products and services that can be effectively used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. To achieve our goal, this Accessibility Policy establishes seven key objectives to guide our actions as a company. All HP managers and employees are expected to support these objectives and their implementation in accordance with their roles and responsibilities:

Raise the level of awareness of accessibility issues within our company, and provide our employees with the training they need to design, produce, market, and deliver accessible products and services. Develop accessibility guidelines for products and services, and hold product development groups accountable for implementing these guidelines where competitively, technically, and economically feasible. Involve people with disabilities in the development of accessibility guidelines, and in the design and testing of products and services. Document accessibility features and make information about our products and services publicly available in an accessible form. Establish relationships with leading assistive technology and solution providers. Support internal and external research and development that will improve assistive technology relevant to our products and services. Support and contribute to industry standards and guidelines for accessibility. International Association of Accessibility Professionals (IAAP) IAAP is a not-for-profit association focused on advancing the accessibility profession through networking, education, and certification. The objective is to help accessibility professionals develop and advance their careers and to better enable organizations to integrate accessibility into their products and infrastructure. Accessibility 63 HP is a founding member, and we joined to participate with other organizations to advance the field of accessibility. This commitment supports our companys accessibility goal of designing, producing, and marketing products and services that can be effectively used by people with disabilities. IAAP will make our profession strong by globally connecting individuals, students, and organizations to learn from one another. If you are interested in learning more, go to http://www.accessibilityassociation.org to join the online community, sign up for newsletters, and learn about membership options. Finding the best assistive technology Everyone, including people with disabilities or age-related limitations, should be able to communicate, express themselves, and connect with the world using technology. HP is committed to increasing accessibility awareness within HP and with our customers and partners. Whether its large fonts that are easy on the eyes, voice recognition that lets you give your hands a rest, or any other assistive technology to help with your specific situationa variety of assistive technologies make HP products easier to use. How do you choose?

Assessing your needs Technology can unleash your potential. Assistive technology removes barriers and helps you create independence at home, at work, and in the community. Assistive technology (AT) helps increase, maintain, and improve the functional capabilities of electronic and information technology. You may choose from many AT products. Your AT assessment should allow you to evaluate several products, answer your questions, and facilitate your selection of the best solution for your situation. You will find that professionals qualified to do AT assessments come from many fields, including those licensed or certified in physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech/language pathology, and other areas of expertise. Others, while not certified or licensed, may also provide evaluation information. You will want to ask about the individual's experience, expertise, and fees to determine if they are appropriate for your needs. Accessibility for HP products HP PCsWindows 7 Accessibility Options The following links provide information on accessibility features and assistive technology, if applicable, included in various HP products. These resources will help you select the specific assistive technology features and product(s) most appropriate for your situation. HP Elite x3Accessibility Options (Windows 10 Mobile) HP Slate 7 TabletsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Tablet (Android 4.1/Jelly Bean) HP SlateBook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features (Android 4.3,4.2/Jelly Bean) HP PCsWindows 10 Accessibility Options HP PCsWindows 8 Accessibility Options HP Chromebook PCsEnabling Accessibility Features on Your HP Chromebook or Chromebox (Chrome OS) HP Shoppingperipherals for HP products If you need additional support with the accessibility features on your HP product, see Contacting support on page 69. Additional links to external partners and suppliers that may provide additional assistance:

Microsoft Accessibility information (Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Microsoft Office) Google Products accessibility information (Android, Chrome, Google Apps) 64 Chapter 14 Accessibility Assistive Technologies sorted by impairment type Assistive Technologies sorted by product type Assistive Technology vendors with product descriptions Assistive Technology Industry Association (ATIA) Standards and legislation Standards Section 508 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) standards was created by the US Access Board to address access to information and communication technology (ICT) for people with physical, sensory, or cognitive disabilities. The standards contain technical criteria specific to various types of technologies, as well as performance-based requirements which focus on functional capabilities of covered products. Specific criteria cover software applications and operating systems, web-based information and applications, computers, telecommunications products, video and multi-media, and self-contained closed products. Mandate 376 EN 301 549 The EN 301 549 standard was created by the European Union within Mandate 376 as the basis for an online toolkit for public procurement of ICT products. The standard specifies the functional accessibility requirements applicable to ICT products and services, together with a description of the test procedures and evaluation methodology for each accessibility requirement. Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) from the W3C's Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) helps web designers and developers create sites that better meet the needs of people with disabilities or age-related limitations. WCAG advances accessibility across the full range of web content (text, images, audio, and video) and web applications. WCAG can be precisely tested, is easy to understand and use, and allows web developers flexibility for innovation. WCAG 2.0 has also been approved as ISO/IEC 40500:2012. WCAG specifically addresses barriers to accessing the web experienced by people with visual, auditory, physical, cognitive, and neurological disabilities, and by older web users with accessibility needs. WCAG 2.0 provides characteristics of accessible content:

Perceivable (for instance, by addressing text alternatives for images, captions for audio, adaptability of presentation, and color contrast) Operable (by addressing keyboard access, color contrast, timing of input, seizure avoidance, and navigability) Understandable (by addressing readability, predictability, and input assistance) Robust (for instance, by addressing compatibility with assistive technologies) Legislation and regulations Accessibility of IT and information has become an area of increasing legislative importance. This section provides links to information on key legislation, regulations, and standards. United States Canada Europe Standards and legislation 65 United Kingdom Australia Worldwide United States Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act specifies that agencies must identify which standards apply to the procurement of ICT, perform market research to determine the availability of accessible products and services, and document the results of their market research. The following resources provide assistance in meeting Section 508 requirements:

www.section508.gov Buy Accessible The U.S. Access Board is currently updating the Section 508 standards. This effort will address new technologies and other areas where the standards need to be modified. For more information, go to Section 508 Refresh. Section 255 of the Telecommunications Act requires telecommunications products and services to be accessible to people with disabilities. FCC rules cover all hardware and software telephone network equipment and telecommunications equipment used in the home or office. Such equipment includes telephones, wireless handsets, fax machines, answering machines, and pagers. FCC rules also cover basic and special telecommunications services, including regular telephone calls, call waiting, speed dialing, call forwarding, computer-provided directory assistance, call monitoring, caller identification, call tracing, and repeat dialing, as well as voice mail and interactive voice response systems that provide callers with menus of choices. For more information, go to Federal Communication Commission Section 255 information. 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA) The CVAA updates federal communications law to increase the access of persons with disabilities to modern communications, updating accessibility laws enacted in the 1980s and 1990s to include new digital, broadband, and mobile innovations. Regulations are enforced by the FCC and documented as 47 CFR Part 14 and Part 79. FCC Guide on the CVAA Other U.S. legislation and initiatives Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Telecommunications Act, the Rehabilitation Act and others Canada The Accessibility for Ontarians with Disabilities Act was established to develop and implement accessibility standards to make goods, services, and facilities accessible to Ontarians with disabilities and to provide for the involvement of persons with disabilities in the development of the accessibility standards. The first standard of the AODA is the customer service standard; however, standards for transportation, employment, and information and communication are also being developed. The AODA applies to the Government of Ontario, the Legislative Assembly, every designated public sector organization, and to every other person or organization that provides goods, services, or facilities to the public or other third parties and that has at least one employee in Ontario; and accessibility measures must be implemented on or before January 1, 2025. For more information, go to Accessibility for Ontarians with Disability Act (AODA) . 66 Chapter 14 Accessibility Europe EU Mandate 376 ETSI Technical Report ETSI DTR 102 612: "Human Factors (HF); European accessibility requirements for public procurement of products and services in the ICT domain (European Commission Mandate M 376, Phase 1)" has been released. Background: The three European Standardization Organizations have set up two parallel project teams to carry out the work specified in the European Commission "Mandate 376 to CEN, CENELEC and ETSI, in Support of Accessibility Requirements for Public Procurement of Products and Services in the ICT Domain."

ETSI TC Human Factors Specialist Task Force 333 has developed ETSI DTR 102 612. Further details about the work performed by STF333 (e.g., Terms of Reference, specification of the detailed work tasks, time plan for the work, previous drafts, listing of comments received and means to contact the task force) can be found at the Special Task Force 333. The parts relating to the assessment of suitable testing and conformity schemes were carried out by a parallel project, detailed in CEN BT/WG185/PT. For further information, go to the CEN project team website. The two projects are closely coordinated. European Commission mandate for e-accessibility (PDF 46KB) Commission takes low profile on e-accessibility CEN project team United Kingdom The Disability Discrimination Act of 1995 (DDA) was enacted to ensure that websites are accessible to blind and disabled users in the United Kingdom. W3C UK Policies Australia The Australian government has announced their plan to implement Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0. All Australian government websites will require Level A compliance by 2012, and Double A by 2015. The new standard replaces WCAG 1.0, which was introduced as a mandated requirement for agencies in 2000. Worldwide JTC1 Special Working Group on Accessibility (SWG-A) G3ict: The Global Initiative for Inclusive ICT Italian accessibility legislation W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Standards and legislation 67 Useful accessibility resources and links The following organizations may be good resources for information about disabilities and age-related limitations. NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list. These organizations are provided for informational purposes only. HP assumes no responsibility for information or contacts you may encounter on the Internet. Listing on this page does not imply endorsement by HP. Organizations American Association of People with Disabilities (AAPD) The Association of Assistive Technology Act Programs (ATAP) Hearing Loss Association of America (HLAA) Information Technology Technical Assistance and Training Center (ITTATC) Lighthouse International National Association of the Deaf National Federation of the Blind Rehabilitation Engineering & Assistive Technology Society of North America (RESNA) Telecommunications for the Deaf and Hard of Hearing, Inc. (TDI) W3C Web Accessibility Initiative (WAI) Educational institutions California State University, Northridge, Center on Disabilities (CSUN) University of Wisconsin - Madison, Trace Center University of Minnesota computer accommodations program Other disability resources ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Technical Assistance Program Business & Disability network EnableMart European Disability Forum Job Accommodation Network Microsoft Enable U.S. Department of Justice - A Guide to disability rights Laws HP links Our contact webform HP comfort and safety guide HP public sector sales 68 Chapter 14 Accessibility Contacting support NOTE: Support is in English only. Customers who are deaf or hard of hearing that have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products:

Use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel to call (877) 656-7058 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Customers with other disabilities or age-related limitations who have questions about technical support or accessibility of HP products, choose one of the following options:

Call (888) 259-5707 Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. Mountain Time. Complete the Contact form for people with disabilities or age-related limitations. Contacting support 69

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide SUMMARY This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. Copyright 20182021 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. WiGig is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Eighth Edition: April 2021 First Edition: March 2018 Document Part Number: L25269-008 About this guide This guide provides regulatory, safety, and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, tablets, desktops, thin clients, personal workstations, all-in-ones, and point-of-sale terminals. To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select User Guides. WARNING!

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION:

Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates information considered important but not hazard-related (for example, messages IMPORTANT:

related to property damage). Warns the user that failure to follow a procedure exactly as described could result in loss of data or in damage to hardware or software. Also contains essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task. NOTE: Contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. TIP: Provides helpful hints for completing a task. iii iv About this guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices ........................................................................................................................................ 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Belarus regulatory notice ...................................................................................................................................... 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union and UK regulatory notices .......................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) ....................... 4 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) .................................................................................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 5 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 5 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 6 China radio equipment notice ................................................................................................................................ 6 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 6 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 6 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand wireless notice ........................................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 LAN 802.11 //: ......................................................................... 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 Telecommunications device approvals ................................................................................................................. 9 Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 10 v Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 10 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 11 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 11 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 11 2 Safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 13 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 13 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 14 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 14 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 14 Acoustics notice ................................................................................................................................................... 14 Battery notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Fan notices ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 15 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 16 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 16 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 16 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 16 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 16 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 16 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 17 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 17 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 17 China ................................................................................................................................ 17 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 17 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 17 Power cord notice .............................................................................................................................. 18 DC plug of external HP power supply ............................................................................. 18 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 18 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 18 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 18 External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................ 18 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 19 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 19 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 20 China altitude notice ......................................................................................................................... 20 China tropical warning notice ............................................................................................................ 20 Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ....................................................... 20 Taiwan eyesight notice ........................................................................................................................................ 21 vi

....................................................................................................................... 21 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 22 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 22 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 22 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 22 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 22 Taiwan battery recycling information ................................................................................................................. 23 Turkey WEEE regulation ...................................................................................................................................... 23 ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ............................................................................................ 23 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 25 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 25 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 25 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 25 China RoHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 29

................................................... 29

............................................................................................................................................... 30

(RoHS) ..................................................... 32

....................................................................................................... 32

(RoHS) ......................................................................................................................................... 33

....................................................................................................... 33 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 34 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 34 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 35 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 35 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico .................................................................. 35 TCO Certified ........................................................................................................................................................ 35 TCO Certified Edge ................................................................................................................................................ 36 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 38 vii viii 1 Regulatory notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) that can be accessed through the system BIOS. Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select products only), under the removable service door (select products only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

Turn on or restart the computer. Press esc or f10 to enter Computer Setup. 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without making any changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and 1 used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1. 2. For questions regarding this product:

Write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 Call HP at 650-857-1501 or Email techregshelp@hp.com To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Modifications Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. Belarus regulatory notice The product complies with the Belarus National Radio/Telecom Technical Regulation TR 2018/024/BY. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Brazil notice Canada notices Este equipamento no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial e no pode causar interferncia em sistemas devidamente autorizados. IMPORTANT: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230V. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115V, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Para maiores informaes, consulte o site da ANATEL www.anatel.gov.br. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in a manner that is in conformance with the expected typical usage. IMPORTANT: When using IEEE 802.11a, n, or ac wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25 GHz to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 GHz to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union and UK regulatory notices The European Union and UK have their own set of regulatory notices. Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking and UK marking have been constructed so that they can operate in at least one EU Member State and UK and comply with one or more of the following EU Directives and the equivalent UK Statutory Instruments as may be applicable:

RED 2014/53/EU; Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU; EMC Directive 2014/30/EU; Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU. Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. Brazil notice 3 The full EU and UK Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following website: http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters: Email techregshelp@hp.com. Products with radio functionality (EMF) Use this notice when you need to provide EMF data for radio operation. This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality (select products only) Some products in some countries have restrictions on radio function. IMPORTANT:

IEEE 802.11x wireless LAN with 5.155.35 GHz frequency band is restricted for indoor use only in all countries reflected in the matrix. Using this WLAN application outdoors might lead to interference issues with existing radio services. Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) The table shows radio frequency bands and maximum power levels for some products and some countries. Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) Radio Technology Bluetooth; 2,4 GHz NFC; 13,56 MHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 2,4 GHz WLAN Wi-Fi 802.11x; 5 GHz WWAN 5G NR (450 MHz7125 MHz) 100 10 100 200 400 RFID; 865-868 MHz/915-921 MHz 2000/4000 WWAN 5G NR (24250 MHz52600 MHz) 316.230 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Table 1-1 Radio frequency bands and maximum power levels (select products and countries only) (continued) Radio Technology Maximum Transmit Power EIRP (mW) WWAN 4G LTE; 700/800/900/1800/2100/2300/2600/3500 MHz WWAN 3G UTMS; 900/2100 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 900 MHz WWAN 2G GSM GPRS EDGE; 1800 MHz WiGig 802.11ad; 60 GHz Ergonomics notice 200 250 2000 1000 316 NOTE: Use only HP-supported software drivers and correct country settings to ensure compliance. When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use for VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sunlight) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Please pay attention when installing a dedicated Tower, Micro Tower Business Desktop PC or Workstation that is not intended to be installed/used in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid annoying reflections at visual display workplaces, this device must not be placed in the direct field of view. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/

regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 China WWAN notice China radio equipment notice Japan notice V-2 B VCCI-B VCCI32-1 B VCCI-B 5GHz Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Some products may use electronic regulatory labels (e-labels). To view the certification mark and numbers on an e-label, please refer to the previous Accessing regulatory labels section. e e Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Aviso sobre conexiones inalmbricas para Mxico:

En el caso de PC de escritorio, equipos All-in-One, terminales de punto de venta, thin clients y workstations en uso normal e instalados con un dispositivo de transmisin y recepcin de radio, una distancia de separacin de 20 cm garantiza que los niveles de exposicin a radiofrecuencia cumplan con los requisitos de Mxico. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are aboard aircraft. The use of these devices aboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand wireless notice

(This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.) This radio communication equipment has the electromagnetic field strength in compliance with the Safety Standard for the Use of Radio communication Equipment on Human Health announced by the National Telecommunications Commission. Taiwan NCC notices The following notices apply to Taiwan. Singapore wireless notice 7 LAN 802.11 //:

Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP website at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance Use this notice to warn of possible radiation exposure from incorrect laser usage. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Modem notices U.S. modem statements Canada, Japan, New Zealand, and the U.S. have their own sets of modem notices. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. Telecommunications device approvals 9 The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Macrovision Corporation notice 11 Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices 2 Safety notices Your product documentation might require one or more of these safety notices. Important safety information These notices could apply to many products. WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. If the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug, always use the power cord with a properly grounded AC outlet to avoid the risk of electric shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. As a safety precaution, if the system power load exceeds the specific configurations capacities, the system may temporarily disable some USB ports. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Important safety information 13 IMPORTANT:

If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to applicable safety standards). Heat-related safety warning notice Use this notice if injury from excessive heat is a possibility. WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the mobile computer, do not place the mobile computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the mobile computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The mobile computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by applicable safety standards. Potential safety conditions notice Use this notice to warn users about the possibility that a failure was not safe and controlled. If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. WARNING! Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Use this notice when the sound pressure level might be lower than recommended or expected. Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779). To display product noise emission data, go to IT ECO Declarations at http://www.hp.com/go/ted, and then select a product category from the drop-down menu. One or more of these safety notices might apply to your product's battery. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. WARNING! Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Acoustics notice Battery notices 14 Chapter 2 Safety notices WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Fast charging may not be available for non-compatible or non-HP batteries. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. WARNING! Do not ingest battery, a Chemical Burn Hazard. WARNING! This product contains a coin/button cell battery. If the coin/button cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and can lead to death. WARNING! Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away WARNING!

from children. WARNING!

immediate medical attention. If you think batteries might have been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek WARNING!

explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding environment can result in an WARNING! A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure may result in an explosion or the leakage of flammable liquid or gas. Table 2-1 Battery disposal icon and description Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Fan notices Use one or more of these notices to warn users about the dangers of injuries from spinning fan blades. WARNING!

Keep body parts away from moving parts. WARNING! Keep body parts away from fan blades. WARNING! Keep body parts out of the motion path. Headset and earphone volume level notice This notice warns about the danger of high volume settings for headsets and earphones. Fan notices 15 WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Adjustment of the volume control as well as the equalizer to other settings than the center position may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. The use of factors influencing the ear-/headphones output other than those specified by the manufacturer (e.g. operating system, equalizer software, firmware, driver) may increase the ear-/headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007 or Laser Notice No. 56, dated May 8, 2019. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Different countries have different requirements for power supplies and power cords. Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or an HP Inc. authorized replacement. Brazil notice Denmark Finland Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. 16 Chapter 2 Safety notices Norway Sweden Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. China For use in Norway CCC Some products are designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230 V. Power cord set requirements One or more of these notices might apply to your product's power cord. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from HP Inc. or an approved HP Inc. source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/support. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirement listed below is applicable to all countries:

The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. Power supply and power cord set requirements 17 The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. DC plug of external HP power supply The diagram illustrates the DC plug of external HP power supply. Japan power cord notice Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard Use this notice to warn about the possibility of pinching injuries. WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection Several safety notices might apply to TV antenna connectors. External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 2-2 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. Travel notice Use this notice to warn about the possibility of serious injury from voltage converter kits. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Travel notice 19 China safety notices China altitude notice 2000m 2000m China tropical warning notice Norway and Sweden cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner Norway and Sweden require a galvanic isolator for grounding. 20 Chapter 2 Safety notices CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan eyesight notice This eyesight notice applies to products in Taiwan.

(1) 30 10

(2) 2 2 1 Taiwan eyesight notice 21 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Use this notice to explain the icon associated with waste disposal. Table 3-1 Disposal of waste equipment icon and its description Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Brazil hardware recycling information No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no daven ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar Taiwan battery recycling information This notice provides the regulations for battery manufacture and recycling in Taiwan. Table 3-2 Taiwan battery recycling icon and its description Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Turkey WEEE regulation Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: AEEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur ENERGY STAR Certification (select products only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, HP Inc. has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Taiwan battery recycling information 23 Table 3-3 Preset power management features when the computer is operating on AC power Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management website at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR website at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices China PC energy label China requires this notice of energy efficiency. In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers, this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. Chemical substances 25 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Table 3-4 Typical Energy Consumption (TEC) values Product Type TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Category B 125.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa Category C 159.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa Category D 184.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Portable Computer Category A 20.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa Category B 26.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa Category C 54.5+Efa 75.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers". Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Table 3-5 Product category and configuration description Product Type Configuration Description Category A Category B Category C Category D Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit 26 Chapter 3 Environmental notices For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. China PC energy label 27 28 Chapter 3 Environmental notices China RoHS China uses the following notices for RoHS. Table 3-6

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China RoHS 29 Table 3-6 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

/Java USB USB SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Table 3-7

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI))

30 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

(Cr(VI)) I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB 3D /

X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 China RoHS 31 Table 3-7 (continued)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(PBB)

(PBDE)

"X" RoHS

"X" RoHS

(Cr(VI))

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Unit Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Cables

Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display (LCD) panel Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power pack Power supply Storage Devices 32 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Table 3-8 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Wireless Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals.

(RoHS) Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Cables

/ Chassis/Other

I/O PCAs

(LCD) Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel (for AIO only) Memory

(RoHS) 33 Table 3-9 Declaration of the Presence Condition of the Restricted Substances Marking

(continued) Restricted substances and its chemical symbols Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent chromium (Cr

+6) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Unit Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Power supply Storage Devices 1 0.1 % 0.01 %

Note 1: "Exceeding 0.1 wt %" and "exceeding 0.01 wt %" indicate that the percentage content of the restricted substance exceeds the reference percentage value of presence condition. 2 Note 2: "" indicates that the percentage content of the restricted substance does not exceed the percentage of reference value of presence. 3 Note 3: The "" indicates that the restricted substance corresponds to the exemption. http://www.hp.com/support To access the latest user guides, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and follow the instructions to find your product. Then select Manuals. India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product, as well as its related consumables and spares, complies with the reduction in hazardous substances provisions of the "India E-waste Rule 2016."

It does not contain lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except where allowed pursuant to the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 The European Union requires this notice about power consumption. To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. 34 Chapter 3 Environmental notices IT ECO declarations Use these links to provide locations for IT ECO declarations. http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/iteconotebook-o.html http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Notebook or tablet PCs Desktop PCs and Thin Clients Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 1 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950/

A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a las estaciones de trabajo. TCO Certified This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified logo. IT ECO declarations 35 TCO Certified Edge This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 36 Chapter 3 Environmental notices TCO Certified Edge 37 Index Symbols/Numerics 32, 33 32, 33 A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 20 Aviso para o Brasil 3 avisos Brasil 3 B battery 14 battery notice 8, 22 battery recycling 22 Belarus regulatory notice 2 Brazil notice 3, 16 C cable grounding notice 20 Canada modem statement 10 Canada notices 3 China environmental notices 25 China PC energy label 25 D disposal notices battery 22 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 22 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 22 ENERGY STAR certification 23 environmental notices 22 equipment disposal notice 22 ergonomics notice 5 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 34 38 Index F fan notice 15 Federal Communications Commission notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers modifications 2 notebook computers notice 1 G GS Notice 5 H headset and earphone volume level notice 15 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 34 J Japan modem statement 10 Japan notice 6 Japan power cord notice 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 35 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 8, 16 M Macrovision Corporation notice 11 maximum power levels 4 Mexico wireless notice 6 modem notices 9 modem statements Canada 10 Japan 10 New Zealand 11 U.S. 9 modifications, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 11 notices airline travel 8 battery 8, 14, 22 Belarus regulatory 2 Brazil 3, 16 Canada 3 environmental 22 equipment disposal 22 ergonomics 5 fan 15 headset and earphone volume level 15 India restriction of hazardous substances 34 Japan 6 Japan power cord 18 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 35 laser safety 8, 16 Macrovision Corporation 11 Mexico 6 modem 9 perchlorate material 25 power cords 18 Singapore 7 South Korea 7 Taiwan 7 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel 19 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 P power cord notice 18 R radio frequency bands 4 recycling, electronic hardware and battery 22 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7 T Taiwan notice 7 TCO Certified Certification 35 TCO Certified Edge Certification 36 Thailand wireless notice 7 travel notice 19 tropical warning notice 20 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 20 U U.S. modem statement 9 V voice support 11 volume level notice, headset and earphone 15 W wireless LAN devices 2 Index 39

Label & Label location for TPN-Q283 Bottom Side RMN: TPN-Q283 Contains Media Tek Radio Model: MT7921 Contains FCC ID: B94-MT7921S Contains IC: 466X-MT7921L43

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6374585.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case 3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States U.S. Agent for Service of Process Attestation To the attention of Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Applicant / Designated U.S Agent Company Name: HP Inc. FRN: 0025126541 Grantee Code: B94 Contact Person: Richard P Tarsio Street Address: 3390 East Harmony Road, Colorado, United States, City/Province/Zip: Fort Collins 80528 Tel.: 970-898-8713 Email: richard.tarsio@hp.com This letter is to confirm that the Applicant has designated itself as the U.S Agent for service of process as required by 2.911(d)(7). The Applicant further acknowledges acceptance to maintain an agent for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Applicant / U.S. Agent Signature:

Date: 2023-02-21 Signed by (printed name): Person: Richard P Tarsio

Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: November 15, 2023 Ref: Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(5)(i)&(ii) Filing FCC ID: B94-MT7921S Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i) HP Inc. (the applicant) certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii) HP Inc. (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates that producing covered equipment. Sincerely, _____________________________________________ Liang Rong Chiao / Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch Tel.: T +886-2-37892469 E-mail: frances.liang@hp.com

Date: December 7, 2023 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Requesting permissive change To Whom It May Concern:

The purpose of this letter is to request a Permissive change for FCC ID: B94-MT7921S, Original grant date: May 27, 2021 The major change filed under this application isThe major change filed under this application is 1. The subject approved module is being used in different host (Portable category Configuration, Host Brand/Model: HP/ TPN-W157) 2. SAR Testing is performed to demonstrate RF Compliance. 3. The difference compared with the original design is adding new antennas to this EUT. Antenna is of same type and lower gain from original approval Please refer antenna report for details 4. Software security remains unchanged from original application. 5. Power reduction and sensor mechanism is remained unchanged from that used in the reference PAG device. Sincerely, ________________________________ Liang Rong Chiao / Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com

Date: December 7, 2023 Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 REQUEST FOR CONFIDENTIALITY - FCC FCC ID: B94-MT7921S Pursuant to Sections 0.457(d) and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules and FCC Guidance document 726920, we hereby request permanent confidential treatment of exhibits identified as such in the table below and request they are permanently withheld from public review based on the documents containing trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of this information might be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We also request short-term confidentiality on certain exhibits until the intended date of marketing as outlined below. We request the exhibits be withheld from public view for a period of (180) days. We attest marketing of the product will only commence after the period of short-term confidentiality expires, or if marketing is to commence before the requested number of days listed above, the grantee will inform the TCB to release the Short-Term Confidentiality information withheld on the FCC equipment authorization website. Exhibit Block Diagrams Operation Description Software defined radio & security info Parts List & Placement/BOM Tune-Up Procedure Schematic Diagrams External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos Users Manual Type of Confidentiality Requested Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent Permanent

Permanent*

Permanent*

Short Term Short Term

Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term Short Term The asterisked items (*) require further information to be provided in this justification letter before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 D01 found at:

https://apps.fcc.gov/oetcf/kdb/forms/FTSSearchResultPage.cfm?switch=P&id=41731 and review section II, 3) regarding specific information that must accompany these requests. Note: any documents held under the Short-Term confidentiality will automatically become public after the requested time if an appropriate extension request has not been received. Any exhibits (i.e., schematic diagrams) that may have already been requested to have Permanent confidentiality as shown above need not be repeated under Short-Term confidentiality request. Sincerely, Signed:

Printed name: Liang Rong Chiao Title: Worldwide Technical Regulations Company Name: HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch

Authorization on Behalf of HP Inc. For the US Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology and Other FCC Programs and Offices 1. I, Richard P Tarsio, am on the Worldwide Technical Regulations staff of HP Inc. (HP) and Applicant/Grantee Contact of Record for HP Inc. together with its subsidiaries and affiliates worldwide (collectively, HP) for HPs dealings with the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC). I am duly authorized by HP Inc. to make this Authorization on HP Inc.s behalf. 2. This Authorization will designate the person named below to act on my behalf and HP Inc.s behalf as authorized agent and representative, until further notice, with the additional power to designate one or more third party agents for HP Inc. with regard to particular matters and applications. All acts carried out and requests made by this named representative relating to any matter before the FCC, including requests for confidentiality, shall have the same effect as mine. Name:

Title:

Address:

Rong-Chiao Liang Regulatory Program Manager HP Inc. 10F, No. 66 Jingmao 2nd Rd NanGang District Taipei, Taiwan 11568 866 2 37892469 frances.liang@hp.com Telephone:

E-mail:

3. Questions about the scope and effect of this Authorization should be addressed as follows:

4. I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct, and that this Authorization was executed at Fort Collins, Colorado on the date indicated below my signature. Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations 3390 East Harmony Road, MS 66 Fort Collins, CO 80528 970 898 8713 Telephone richard.tarsio@hp.com ____________________________ Signature Richard P Tarsio US Canada Technical Regulations HP Inc. Date: 24 June 2016

TO:

Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding: FCC IDB94-MT7921S To whom it may concern:

Date: November 8, 2023 We, the undersigned, hereby authorize << SGS Taiwan Ltd.>> to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. a. Name, address and contact information of third party:

SGS Taiwan Ltd. Jim Chang Telephone: +886 2 2299 3279 Ext 1194 E-mail: jim.chang@sgs.com No. 134, Wu Kung Rd., New Taipei Industrial Park, Wu Ku District,New Taipei City, 24803 Taiwan b. Term of designation, unless earlier terminated by HP: 1 year. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862(a). Where our agent signs the application for certification on our behalf, I acknowledge that all responsibility for complying with the terms and conditions for Certification, as specified by TIMCO Engineering, Inc, still resides with << HP Inc. >>. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. __________________________ Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T+886 2 3789-2469

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: B94-MT7921S The intension of this application is to enable the modular FCC ID: B94-MT7921S, granted on 05/27/2021 to be integrated in HP Notebook PC, TPN-Q296. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: B94-MT7921S was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Sincerely yours, Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469

3390 East Harmony Road Fort Collins Colorado 80528 United States FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046 SUBJECT: Class II Permissive Change for FCC ID: B94-MT7921S The intension of this application is to enable the modular FCC ID: B94-MT7921S, granted on 05/27/2021 to be integrated in HP Notebook PC, TPN-Q283. The module installed into host platform mentioned above is electronically and mechanically identical to the original certified module. The Original FCC testing on module under FCC ID: B94-MT7921S was performed with an antenna of higher gain, and the antenna was connected to the module in an open environment. The current host platform under application uses an antenna of the same type but of lower gain and is installed inside the host platform enclosure. The physical restraints introduced by the host platform should have resulted in equal or lower level of radiated emission. Therefore, additional Radiated emission testing is not necessary. Software security remains unchanged from the original application. Sincerely yours, Liang Rong Chiao Worldwide Technical Regulations HP International Pte. Ltd., Taiwan Branch 10F-1, 66, Jingmao 2nd Road, Nangang District, Taipei 115. Taiwan frances.liang@hp.com T +886-2-37892469